Sei sulla pagina 1di 267

iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)

V100R001C00
User Guide

Issue 04

Date 2014-09-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: support@huawei.com

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Copyright © Huawei i
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide About This Document

About This Document

Overview
This document describes how to use the SAU on a GSM or UMTS network. It covers
hardware installation, software installation (including the EBC and EMS service
components), IP address configuration, operation and maintenance (OM), common
operations, and troubleshooting methods of common faults. After all service components are
installed on each SAU board, you can deliver counters for each theme to the SAU through
upper-layer analysis systems, requesting the SAU to collect and preprocess data.

Upper-Layer Products and Versions


The following table lists the upper-layer products and versions related to this document.

Service Upper-Layer Product RAT Upper-Layer


Component Product
Installed on Version
the SAU

EBC service U2000/M2000(EBC) UMTS V200R013C00


component &
V200R014C00
&
V200R015C00
EMS service U2000/M2000( The NE data UMTS V200R013C00
component Trace Server) collected by &
SAU (EMS V200R014C00
service &
component) V200R015C00

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide About This Document

Service Upper-Layer Product RAT Upper-Layer


Component Product
Installed on Version
the SAU

will be used by GSM V200R014C00


the following &
products V200R015C00
through Trace
Server of
U2000/M2000:
 PRS:
V100R014C
00
 SONMaster:
V100R014C
00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
 Field engineers
 Network optimization engineers

Change History
Issue 04 (2014-09-30)
This is the fourth commercial release.
Compared with Issue 03 (2014-07-30), Issue 04 (2014-09-30) includes the following changes:

Section Change Description

3.1.2 Preparing for the Installation Modified.


3.1.7.1 SAU IP Addresses and Planning
Principles
4.1.5 How Do I Ensure Normal
Communication Between the SAU and
OMU When the OMU's Internal Network
Segment Changes
7.2 List for the SAU Software
Configurations Before Delivery

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide About This Document

Issue 03 (2014-07-30)
This is the third commercial release.
Compared with Issue 02 (2014-07-15), Issue 03 (2014-07-30) includes the following changes:

Section Change Description

1 Mapping Versions Modified.


3.1.6.2 Installing SAU Applications (for the
EBC and EMS Service Components)
3.1.5 Checking OS Hardening

Issue 02 (2014-07-15)
This is the second commercial release.
Compared with Issue 01 (2014-05-20), Issue 02 (2014-07-15) includes the following changes:

Section Change Description

3.4.7 Granting the Function of Running Added.


SAU Processes as a Non-root User
2.5 Introduction to Active and Standby Added.
Workspaces of the SAU
7.3 User Names and Initial User Passwords Modified.

Issue 01 (2014-05-20)
The guide is divided into two guides for installing and maintaining the Nastar and EBC&EMS
service components, respectively.
This guide is used for installing and maintaining the EBC&EMS service component. This
issue is the first release.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document....................................................................................................................ii


1 Mapping Versions.........................................................................................................................1
2 Introduction to the SAU...............................................................................................................3
2.1 Network Position............................................................................................................................................................4
2.2 Board Description.........................................................................................................................................................10
2.2.1 Functions of SAU Boards..........................................................................................................................................10
2.2.2 SAU Panel.................................................................................................................................................................10
2.2.3 Ports on the SAU Board............................................................................................................................................13
2.2.4 LEDs on the SAU Board...........................................................................................................................................14
2.2.5 Specifications of the SAU.........................................................................................................................................16
2.2.6 Configuration of SAU Ethernet Adapters..................................................................................................................18
2.3 Slot Planning................................................................................................................................................................20
2.4 Software Architecture...................................................................................................................................................21
2.5 Introduction to Active and Standby Workspaces of the SAU......................................................................................24
2.6 Precautions...................................................................................................................................................................24
2.7 SAU Installation and Maintenance Scenarios..............................................................................................................25

3 SAU Operation Guide................................................................................................................27


3.1 Installing and Commissioning the SAU.......................................................................................................................27
3.1.1 SAU Installation Procedure During Initial Commissioning......................................................................................27
3.1.2 Preparing for the Installation.....................................................................................................................................30
3.1.3 Installing the SAU Board..........................................................................................................................................33
3.1.3.1 Installing the SAUc Board in a Subrack.................................................................................................................34
3.1.3.2 Installing the ESAUa Board...................................................................................................................................36
3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU..............................................................................................................................................39
3.1.5 Checking OS Hardening............................................................................................................................................40
3.1.6 Installing the SAU Software......................................................................................................................................40
3.1.6.1 Uploading the SAU Application Package..............................................................................................................40
3.1.6.2 Installing SAU Applications (for the EBC and EMS Service Components)..........................................................42
3.1.6.3 Checking the Installation of the SAU Applications (for the EBC Service Component)........................................46
3.1.6.4 Checking the Installation of the SAU Applications (for the EMS Service Component).......................................48
3.1.7 Commissioning the SAU...........................................................................................................................................50

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Contents

3.1.7.1 SAU IP Addresses and Planning Principles...........................................................................................................50


3.1.7.2 Changing the IP Address of the SAU (for the EBC or EMS Service Component)................................................53
3.1.7.3 Adding an SAU Board............................................................................................................................................57
3.1.7.4 Setting a Central FTP Server..................................................................................................................................57
3.1.8 Checking the Installation and Commissioning of the SAU.......................................................................................58
3.2 Reinstalling and Commissioning the SAU...................................................................................................................61
3.2.1 SAU Reinstallation Procedure...................................................................................................................................61
3.2.2 Installing the Operating System................................................................................................................................63
3.2.2.1 Preparing the USB Installation CD-ROM..............................................................................................................64
3.2.2.2 Installing the Operating System.............................................................................................................................69
3.3 Replace an SAU Board.................................................................................................................................................70
3.4 Operating and Maintaining the SAU............................................................................................................................75
3.4.1 Checking the Version of the Operating System.........................................................................................................75
3.4.2 Changing the IP Address of the SAU Ethernet Adapter Team (for the EBC or EMS Service Component).............75
3.4.3 Changing the SAU Name (for the EBC or EMS Service Component).....................................................................76
3.4.4 Setting the SAU Routing and Forwarding Function.................................................................................................78
3.4.5 Setting the Function of Recording Real-time Operating System Access Information..............................................80
3.4.6 Setting SSL Configuration Parameters of the SAU...................................................................................................82
3.4.7 Granting the Function of Running SAU Processes as a Non-root User....................................................................83
3.4.8 Checking and Resetting the SAU..............................................................................................................................86
3.4.8.1 Checking the Operating Status of the SAU............................................................................................................86
3.4.8.2 Resetting the SAU..................................................................................................................................................86
3.4.9 Managing the SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component)............................................................................87
3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component)...........................................................87
3.4.9.2 Starting SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component)..................................................................................88
3.4.9.3 Stopping SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component)................................................................................88
3.4.10 Managing the SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component).........................................................................89
3.4.10.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component)........................................................89
3.4.10.2 Starting SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component)................................................................................90
3.4.10.3 Stopping SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component)..............................................................................90
3.4.11 Managing SAU Users..............................................................................................................................................91
3.4.11.1 Changing the Password of Operating System User root......................................................................................91
3.4.11.2 Changing the Password of Operating System User..............................................................................................92
3.4.11.3 Changing the Password of mysql Database User.................................................................................................93
3.4.12 Maintaining the SAU Routinely..............................................................................................................................95
3.4.12.1 Periodically Checking and Cleaning Up the SAU Disk.......................................................................................95
3.4.12.2 Transferring Backup Files....................................................................................................................................96
3.4.13 Adjust SAU Slots.....................................................................................................................................................97

4 FAQs...............................................................................................................................................99
4.1 Hardware Problems Related to the SAU......................................................................................................................99
4.1.1 How Can I Set Hard Disks to the RAID 1 Mode......................................................................................................99

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Contents

4.1.2 How Can I Query the Hardware Mapping Relations of Network Adapters............................................................105
4.1.3 How Can I Query the Network Configuration of Ethernet Adapters......................................................................106
4.1.4 How Can I Boot the SAU from the USB................................................................................................................106
4.1.5 How Do I Ensure Normal Communication Between the SAU and OMU When the OMU's Internal Network
Segment Changes.............................................................................................................................................................108
4.1.6 How Can I Set the Link Mode of the External Ethernet Adapter of the SAU.........................................................110
4.2 Software Problems Related to the SAU.....................................................................................................................112
4.2.1 How Do I Use FileZilla to Transfer Files?..............................................................................................................112
4.2.2 How Can I Log In To the SAU in SSH Mode.........................................................................................................114
4.2.3 How Can I Start the omutool...................................................................................................................................116
4.2.4 How Can I Set the IP Address of a PC....................................................................................................................117
4.2.5 How Do I Uninstall SAU Applications?..................................................................................................................118
4.2.6 How Can I Install the Integrity Check Tool for Installation Packages....................................................................121
4.2.7 How Do I Open and Close the Non-Encrypted Json Port of the SAU?..................................................................122
4.2.8 How Do I Manually Update SAU Digital Certificates?..........................................................................................124
4.2.9 How Do I Query the Occupied Ports on the SAU?.................................................................................................130
4.2.10 How Do I Manually Change the Authentication Key on the SAU?......................................................................131
4.2.11 How Do I Enable or Disable the SSL Renegotiation Function on the SAU?........................................................132
4.2.12 How Do I Set SSL Configuration Parameters on the SAU by Running Commands on the Server?....................134
4.2.13 How Do I Set FTP Client Parameters on the SAU by Running Commands on the Server?.................................137

5 Appendix A: SAU Command Reference...............................................................................141


5.1 Linux Commands.......................................................................................................................................................141
5.1.1 route Command.......................................................................................................................................................141
5.1.2 ifconfig Command...................................................................................................................................................143
5.1.3 ping Command........................................................................................................................................................146
5.2 SAU MML Commands..............................................................................................................................................147
5.2.1 SAU MML Commands (BSC6900)........................................................................................................................147
5.2.1.1 Display the Information of SAU(DSP SAU).......................................................................................................147
5.2.1.2 Display SAU Work Area Information(DSP SAUAREA).....................................................................................149
5.2.1.3 Display Modules State on SAU(DSP SAUMODULE)........................................................................................151
5.2.1.4 Display SAU Server State(DSP SAUSRV)..........................................................................................................152
5.2.1.5 Display SAU Business Instance(DSP SAUINSTANCE).....................................................................................155
5.2.1.6 Display SAU Certificate Synchronization Status(DSP SAUCERTFILE)...........................................................156
5.2.1.7 Reset SAU Service(RST SAU)............................................................................................................................158
5.2.1.8 Swap SAU Work Area(SWP SAUAREA)...........................................................................................................160
5.2.1.9 Set SAU FTP Center(SET SAUCENTER)..........................................................................................................161
5.2.1.10 List SAU FTP Center(LST SAUCENTER).......................................................................................................163
5.2.1.11 List SAU SSL Configuration(LST SAUSSLCONF)..........................................................................................164
5.2.1.12 Add Board(ADD BRD)......................................................................................................................................166
5.2.1.13 Remove Board(RMV BRD)...............................................................................................................................179
5.2.1.14 Display the Information of OMU(DSP OMU)...................................................................................................180
5.2.1.15 Set SAU FTP Client Security Policy(SET SAUFTPSCLT)...............................................................................183

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Contents

5.2.1.16 List SAU FTP Client Security Policy(LST SAUFTPSCLT)..............................................................................187


5.2.1.17 List RNC-Oriented Event CHR Process Switch on An Application(LST UMMEVENTCHRCTRL)..............189
5.2.2 SAU MML Commands (BSC6910)........................................................................................................................191
5.2.2.1 Display the Information of SAU(DSP SAU).......................................................................................................191
5.2.2.2 Display SAU Work Area Information(DSP SAUAREA).....................................................................................193
5.2.2.3 Display Modules State on SAU(DSP SAUMODULE)........................................................................................194
5.2.2.4 Display SAU Server State(DSP SAUSRV)..........................................................................................................196
5.2.2.5 Display SAU Business Instance(DSP SAUINSTANCE).....................................................................................198
5.2.2.6 Display SAU Certificate Synchronization Status(DSP SAUCERTFILE)...........................................................200
5.2.2.7 Reset SAU Service(RST SAU)............................................................................................................................202
5.2.2.8 Swap SAU Work Area(SWP SAUAREA)...........................................................................................................204
5.2.2.9 Set SAU FTP Center(SET SAUCENTER)..........................................................................................................205
5.2.2.10 List SAU FTP Center(LST SAUCENTER).......................................................................................................207
5.2.2.11 List SAU SSL Configuration(LST SAUSSLCONF)..........................................................................................208
5.2.2.12 Add Board(ADD BRD)......................................................................................................................................209
5.2.2.13 Remove Board(RMV BRD)...............................................................................................................................215
5.2.2.14 Display the Information of OMU(DSP OMU)...................................................................................................216
5.2.2.15 Set SAU FTP Client Security Policy(SET SAUFTPSCLT)...............................................................................219
5.2.2.16 List SAU FTP Client Security Policy(LST SAUFTPSCLT)..............................................................................223
5.2.2.17 List RNC-Oriented Event CHR Process Switch on An Application(LST UMMEVENTCHRCTRL)..............225
5.3 SAU Commands.........................................................................................................................................................228
5.3.1 EBC Service Component Commands.....................................................................................................................228
5.3.1.1 svc_profile.sh........................................................................................................................................................228
5.3.1.2 sau4ebc_start........................................................................................................................................................228
5.3.1.3 sau4ebc_stop.........................................................................................................................................................229
5.3.1.4 sau4ebc_kill..........................................................................................................................................................230
5.3.1.5 sau4ebc_ps............................................................................................................................................................231
5.3.1.6 sau4ebc_version...................................................................................................................................................231
5.3.2 EMS Service Component Commands.....................................................................................................................232
5.3.2.1 svc_profile.sh........................................................................................................................................................232
5.3.2.2 sau4ems_start.......................................................................................................................................................233
5.3.2.3 sau4ems_stop........................................................................................................................................................233
5.3.2.4 sau4ems_kill.........................................................................................................................................................234
5.3.2.5 sau4ems_ps...........................................................................................................................................................235
5.3.2.6 sau4ems_version...................................................................................................................................................235

6 Appendix B: SAU Fault Alarm Reference............................................................................237


6.1.1 Alarm List................................................................................................................................................................238
6.2 Fault Alarm Information.............................................................................................................................................238
6.2.1 ALM-20902 SAU Hard Disk Free Space Insufficiency..........................................................................................238
6.2.2 ALM-20903 SAU Process Abort.............................................................................................................................240
6.2.3 ALM-20905 SAU Board Fault................................................................................................................................241

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Contents

6.2.4 ALM-20737 OMU Disconnected from Host...........................................................................................................243


6.2.5 ALM-20854 Peer Certificate Invalid.......................................................................................................................244
6.2.6 EVT-22981 SAU Startup.........................................................................................................................................246
6.2.7 EVT-22982 SAU upload failure..............................................................................................................................247

7 Appendix C: Spreadsheets in SAU User Guide..................................................................250


7.1 Data Sheet of SAU Software Installation Information...............................................................................................250
7.2 List for the SAU Software Configurations Before Delivery......................................................................................251
7.3 User Names and Initial User Passwords.....................................................................................................................253

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Mapping VersionsMapping Versions

1 Mapping Versions

This section describes the mapping upper-layer products and NE versions for the SAU.

Context
 The Nastar service component supporting Nastar applications, the EBC service
component supporting EBC applications, and the EMS service component supporting
Trace Server applications can be deployed on the SAU board.
 The services for the Nastar, EBC, and EMS service components do not affect each other.
 EBC is the feature of the U2000/M2000 product. Trace Server is the component of the
U2000/M2000 product.
 This document describes how to deploy and maintain the EBC and EMS service
components on the SAU board.

 If the NE version used with the SAU is earlier than BSC6900 V900R015C00SPH516/BSC6910
V100R015C00SPH516, only one SAU board where the Nastar service component is deployed can
be configured on the NE. The EBC and EMS service components cannot be deployed on the SAU
board.
 If the NE version used with SAU is BSC6900 V900R015C00SPH516/BSC6910
V100R015C00SPH516 or later, a maximum of two SAU boards can be configured on the NE. One
board is used for deploying the Nastar service component. The other board is used for deploying the
EBC or EMS service component or both.
 If both SAU boards are configured on the NE side, the software version of the SAU board for
deploying the Nastar service component must be GENEX Nastar V600R011C00SPC201 or later. If
the software version does not meet the requirement, you need to upgrade it. Otherwise, it cannot
support two SAU boards. The software version of the SAU board for deploying the EBC/EMS
service component supports two SAU boards by default.

Version mapping
Service Upper- Upper- RAT NE Version
Compone Layer Layer
nt Product Product
Installed Version
on the
SAU

EBC U2000/M20 V200R015C UMTS  BSC6910 UMTS

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Mapping VersionsMapping Versions

Service Upper- Upper- RAT NE Version


Compone Layer Layer
nt Product Product
Installed Version
on the
SAU

service 00 (EBC) 00 V100R015C00SPH516 or


component later
 BSC6900 UMTS
V900R015C00SPH516 or
later
 BSC6910 GU
V100R015C00SPH516 or
later
 BSC6900 GU
V900R015C00SPH516 or
later
EMS U2000/M20 V200R013C UMTS  BSC6910 UMTS
service 00 (Trace 00 & V100R015C00SPH516 or
component Server) V200R014C later
NOTE 00 &  BSC6900 UMTS
The NE data V200R015C V900R015C00SPH516 or
collected by 00 later
SAU (EMS
service
 BSC6910 GU
component) V100R015C00SPH516 or
will be used later
by the
following
 BSC6900 GU
products V900R015C00SPH516 or
through later
Trace Server
of V200R014C GSM  BSC6910 GSM V100R016 or
U2000/M20 00 & later
00: V200R015C  BSC6900 GSM V900R016 or
 PRS: 00 later
V100R01
4C00  BSC6910 GU V100R016 or
 SONMast later
er:  BSC6900 GU V900R016 or
V100R01
4C00
later

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

2 Introduction to the SAU

About This Chapter


The Service Aware Unit (SAU) is responsible for collecting and preprocessing raw data
generated by the corresponding NE. Then, the SAU uploads the preprocessed data to EBC,
and Trace Server. To protect user privacy, the collected or obtained data and information can
be anonymized.
2.1 Network Position
This section describes the position of the SAU on the network. Relationships between the
SAU, OMU, and upper-layer service analysis systems are displayed in a networking.
2.2 Board Description
This section describes the SAU board. The SAU board and the OMU board are configured in
one subrack. The physical bearer of the SAU board is the SAUc or ESAUa. The ESAUa
occupies two slots in the subrack and the SAUc occupies only one slot in the subrack.
2.3 Slot Planning
This section describes how to plan slots for the SAU. The SAU must be installed in slots that
meet the specific requirements for different NE versions.
2.4 Software Architecture
This section describes the SAU software architecture.
2.5 Introduction to Active and Standby Workspaces of the SAU
The active and standby workspaces of the SAU are used for upgrading and rolling back the
versions of the BAM platform and implements quick switches between BAM platform
versions.
2.6 Precautions
This section describes the precautions. Relevant precautions must be followed to ensure the
proper operation of the SAU.
2.7 SAU Installation and Maintenance Scenarios
This section describes how to install and maintain an SAU board.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

2.1 Network Position


This section describes the position of the SAU on the network. Relationships between the
SAU, OMU, and upper-layer service analysis systems are displayed in a networking.

Position of the SAU on the Network


Figure 2-1 shows the position of the SAU on the network. Table 2-1 describes each
component shown in Figure 2-1.
In Figure 2-1, the external network consists of the U2000/M2000, U2000(EBC), Trace Server,
SONMaster, PRS, and SAU, and the internal network consists of OMU and SAU.

Figure 1.1 Position of the SAU on the network

Table 1.1 Description of each component


Network Position Component Description

Internal network OMU Operation and maintenance


unit (OMU), which is
installed as a board in the
base station controller and
operates and maintains the
base station controller.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

Network Position Component Description

SAU Service aware unit (SAU),


which is installed as a board
in the base station controller
and collects and
preprocesses raw data
required for the SONMaster
and PRS.
External network EBC When the U2000/M2000
provides the EBC feature,
the SAU needs to preprocess
raw data into analysis data
that meets the requirements
of the EBC feature.
Trace Server Centralized management
center for collecting
signaling data and storing
and distributing data. It
provides data for the
SONMaster and PRS.
PRS The PRS requires data
provided by the Trace Server
when it provides the RAN
service visibility function.
SONMaster The SONMaster requires
data provided by the Trace
Server when it performs
optimization analysis and
provides optimization
advice.

 Any of the SAUc, or ESAUa board can serve as SAU.


 The SAUc must be used if the SAU is required for the BSC6900.
 The ESAUa must be used if the SAU is required for the BSC6910.

Networking of the SAU in a Controller


The internal Ethernet adapters of the SAU board are connected to the OMU boards in the
subrack, and the external Ethernet adapters of the SAU board are connected to EBC, and
Trace Server. The external Ethernet adapters of the OMU board are connected to the LMT and
U2000/M2000. This ensures that the SAU can communicate with the LMT and EBC, and
Trace Server.
 Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show the networking of the SAUc board.
 Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 show the networking of the ESAUa board.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

Figure 1.1 Networking of the SAUc board (with a single LAN switch)

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

Figure 1.2 Networking of the SAUc board (with two LAN switches)

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

Figure 1.3 Networking of the ESAUa board (with a single LAN switch)

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

Figure 1.4 Networking of the ESAUa board (with two LAN switches)

 For details, see 2.2.6 Configuration of SAU Ethernet Adapters.


 The Ethernet port marked in blue in the above figures must be enabled with the Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP) function to prevent network storms.
 The two internal Ethernet adapters of the SAU board are connected to the OMU board in
the subrack through the backplane.
 The two external Ethernet adapters of the SAU board are connected to EBC, and Trace
Server through network equipment such as hubs, LAN switches, and routers.
 The external Ethernet adapters of the OMU board are connected to the LMT and
U2000/M2000.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

2.2 Board Description


This section describes the SAU board. The SAU board and the OMU board are configured in
one subrack. The physical bearer of the SAU board is the SAUc or ESAUa. The ESAUa
occupies two slots in the subrack and the SAUc occupies only one slot in the subrack.

2.2.1 Functions of SAU Boards


An SAU board collects data reported by NEs and preprocesses original data files. Then, the
SAU board uploads the data files to the Trace Server, and EBC.

Functions
The SAU board provides the following functions:
 For the Trace Server:
− Filters and aggregates raw data reported by NEs according to data subscription
requests from the Trace Server.
− Sends data preprocessing results to the Trace Server. The Trace Server then provides
the data for the SONMaster and PRS.
 For the EBC (Event-based Counter) feature:
− Filters and aggregates raw data reported by NEs according to activated EBC counters
on the U2000/M2000.
− Sends data preprocessing results to the U2000/M2000 for the U2000/M2000 to
generate EBC counters.

2.2.2 SAU Panel


This section describes the components on the SAU panel, such as indicators, ports, buttons,
and hard disks.

SAUc Panel
Figure 2-6 shows the SAUc panel.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

Figure 1.1 SAUc Panel

1. Captive screw 2. Ejector lever 3. Self-locking latch 4. RUN indicator


5. ALM indicator 6. ACT indicator 7. Power button 8. HDD indicator
9. OFL indicator 10. COM serial port 11. ETH0 port 12. ETH1 port
13. VGA port 14. USB port 15. ETH2 port -

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

To power off the SAUc, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away from
the front panel of the SAUc. After the OFL (OFFLINE) indicator is on steady, remove the SAUc.

ESAUa Panel
Figure 2-7 shows the ESAUa panel.

Figure 1.1 ESAUa panel

1. Captive screw 2. Ejector lever 3. Self-locking 4. RUN indicator


latch
5. ALM 6. ACT indicator 7. RESET button 8. SHUTDOWN button
indicator
9. USB port 10. ETH0 port 11. ETH1 port 12. ETH2 port
13. VGA port 14. HD0_RAID/ALM 15. HD0_ACT 16. HD1_RAID/ALM

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

indicator indicator indicator


17. HD1_ACT 18. OFFLINE indicator 19. Hard disk 20. Screw for fixing the
indicator hard disk

 To power off the ESAUa, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away
from the front panel of the ESAUa. After the OFFLINE indicator is on steady, remove the ESAUa.
 The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in emergency.
 The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works in the same way as the reset button on the
PC.
 Pressing the SHUTDOWN or RESET button may scratch the face of hard disks in the ESAUa
board. Therefore, you are advised not to perform this operation frequently.

2.2.3 Ports on the SAU Board


This section describes the ports on the SAU board, including port types and usage.

Ports on the SAUc


Table 2-2 describes the ports on the SAUc.

Table 1.1 Ports on the SAUc


Port Label Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 Operators can use the USB ports USB
only after logging in to the
operating system (OS) running on
the board. The ports does not
require a signal cable or
connection to other devices when
the system runs properly.
Therefore, equipment security is
not affected.
ETH0 to ETH1 The hardware ports are used for RJ45
the communication between the
SAU and EBC, and Trace Server.
ETH2 The port does not require a signal RJ45
cable or connection to other
devices when the system runs
properly. Therefore, equipment
security is not affected.
COM The port does not require a signal DB9
cable or connection to other
devices when the system runs
properly. Therefore, equipment
security is not affected.
VGA Monitor port DB15

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

Ports on the ESAUa


Table 2-3 describes the ports on the ESAUa.

Table 1.1 Ports on the ESAUa


Port Label Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 Operators can use the USB ports USB
only after logging in to the
operating system (OS) running on
the board. The ports does not
require a signal cable or
connection to other devices when
the system runs properly.
Therefore, equipment security is
not affected.
ETH0 to ETH1 The hardware ports are used for RJ45
the communication between the
SAU and EBC, and Trace Server.
ETH2 The port does not require a signal RJ45
cable or connection to other
devices when the system runs
properly. Therefore, equipment
security is not affected.
VGA Monitor port DB15

2.2.4 LEDs on the SAU Board


This section describes the LEDs on the SAU board.

LEDs on the SAUc


Table 2-4 describes the LEDs on the SAUc.

Table 1.1 LEDs on the SAUc


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is running properly.
1s
ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.
for 0.125s
ON There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF No alarm is generated.
ON or blinking An alarm is reported, indicating
that a fault occurs during the board
operation.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is disconnected.
OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.
OFF The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched.
for 0.125s
HDD Green OFF There is no read or write operation
on the hard disk.
Blinking The hard disk is being read or
written.

LEDs on the ESAUa


Table 2-5 describes the LEDs on the ESAUa.

Table 1.1 LEDs on the ESAUa


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is running properly.
1s
ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.
for 0.125s
ON There is power supply, but the
board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the
board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF No alarm is generated.
ON or blinking An alarm is reported, indicating
that a fault occurs during the board
operation.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

LED Color Status Description

OFF The board works in standby mode


or the board is not connected.
OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.
OFF The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.25s and OFF  The board is being switched.
for 0.25s  The operating system has been
installed on the board but no
application is installed.
HD0_RAID/A Colorles OFF RAID1 and hard disk 0 operate
LM s properly.
Yellow ON for 1s and OFF for Hard disk 0 is backing up data.
1s
Red ON RAID1 and hard disk 0 operate
abnormally.
HD0_ACT Green OFF There is no read or write operation
on hard disk 0.
Blinking Hard disk 0 is being read or
written.
HD1_RAID/A Colorles OFF There is no read or write operation
LM s on the hard disk.
Yellow ON for 1s and OFF for Hard disk 1 is backing up data.
1s
Red ON RAID1 and hard disk 1 operate
abnormally.
HD1_ACT Green OFF There is no read or write operation
on hard disk 1.
Blinking Hard disk 1 is being read or
written.

2.2.5 Specifications of the SAU


This section describes the hardware configuration specifications and performance
specifications of the SAU board, including the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, hard disk capacity, memory capacity, operating temperature, and
operating relative humidity.
Table 2-6 describes the technical specifications of the SAU boards.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

Table 1.2 Technical specifications of the SAU boards


Cate Index Index of the SAUc Board Index of the ESAUa Board
gory Name

Hard Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3 mm x 395.4 mm 248 mm x 64.6 mm x 395.4 mm


ware (length x (9.76 in. x 1.27 in. x 15.57 in.) (9.76 in. x 2.54 in. x 15.57 in.)
confi width x
gurat height)
ion
speci Power 90 W 140 W
ficati consumption
ons
Weight 2.5 kg (5.51 lb) 3.87 kg (8.53 lb)
Hard disk 500 GB x 1 600 GB x 2 (RAID 1)
capacity
Memory 8 GB 32 GB
capacity
Long-term 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)
operating
temperature
Short-term 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F) -5°C to 55°C (23°F to 131°F)
operating
temperature
Long-term 5% to 85%
operating
relative
humidity
Short-term 5% to 95%
operating
relative
humidity
Power Two feeds of redundant power supplies provided by the backplane:
supply -48 V DC
Hard Start time of About 3 minutes
ware the SAU
perfo board
rman
ce
speci
ficati
ons

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

Table 1.3 Physical bandwidth requirements (EMS service component)


Interacti Related NE Bandwidth Transmission Delay
on Requirement
Entity

SAU and - N/A -


RNC or Data is
BSC transmitted
through the
backplane.
SAU and BSC6900 GSM 20 Mbit/s Transmitting 5-minute data takes
Trace 5 minutes.
Server of
the BSC6910 GSM 40 Mbit/s Transmitting 5-minute data takes
U2000/M 5 minutes.
2000
BSC6900 UMTS 30 Mbit/s Transmitting 5-minute data takes
2 minutes.
BSC6910 UMTS 60 Mbit/s Transmitting 5-minute data takes
2 minutes.
BSC6900 GU 15 Mbit/s  Transmitting 5-minute BSC
data takes 5 minutes.
 Transmitting 5-minute RNC
data takes 2 minutes.
BSC6910 GU 60 Mbit/s  Transmitting 5-minute BSC
data takes 5 minutes.
 Transmitting 5-minute RNC
data takes 2 minutes.

Table 1.4 Physical bandwidth requirements (EBC service component)


Interaction Entity Bandwidth Requirement Transmission Delay

SAU and RNC N/A -


Data is transmitted through
the backplane.
SAU and M2000/U2000 540 Kbit/s 1 minute
(EBC)
NOTE
The EBC is the feature of the
U2000/M2000 server and
has no independent hardware
entity.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

2.2.6 Configuration of SAU Ethernet Adapters


Multiple Ethernet adapters are configured on the SAU board, and each Ethernet adapter
provides specific functions.

Configuration of Ethernet Adapters on the SAUc


The seven Ethernet adapters on the SAUc are as follows:
 F_ETH0 and F_ETH1: Teamed as an external Ethernet adapter team (bond 1), which is
used for communication between the SAU and Trace Server, and EBC (defined as the
external network).
 F_DBG: Used as a debugging Ethernet adapter of the SAU (bond 2), which is used to
connect the SAU to a PC for SAU commissioning as required. The name of this
debugging Ethernet adapter on the SAUc panel is ETH2.
 B_UPDATE0 and B_UPDATE1: They are, Ethernet adapters for backup channels
(bond3/bond4), which are not used currently.
 B_ETH0 and B_ETH1: The two Ethernet adapters are teamed as an internal Ethernet
adapter team (bond 0), which is used for communication between the SAU and the OMU
board in the BSC/RNC (defined as the internal network).
Figure 2-8 shows the mapping between the ETHxxx and the bondxxx on the SAUc.

Figure 1.1 Mapping between the ETHxxx and the bondxxx on the SAUc

F_ETH0, F_ETH1, and F_DBG are connected to the external network through the Ethernet ports on the
SAUc panel. B_ETH0, B_ETH1, B_UPDATE0, and B_UPDATE1 are connected to the backplane of the
subrack, and they are not displayed on the SAUc panel.

Configuration of Ethernet Adapters on the ESAUa


The six Ethernet adapters on the ESAUa are as follows:
 F_ETH0 and F_ETH1: Teamed as an external Ethernet adapter team (bond 1), which is
used for communication between the SAU and the EBC, and Trace Server (defined as
the external network)

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

 F_DBG: Used as a debugging Ethernet adapter (bond 2), which is used to connect the
SAU to a PC for SAU commissioning as required. The name of this debugging Ethernet
adapter on the ESAUa panel is ETH2.
 B_UPDATE: It is the Ethernet adapter for backup channels (bond3), which is not used
by the SAU currently.
 B_ETH0 and B_ETH1: The two Ethernet adapters are teamed as the internal Ethernet
adapter team, that is, bond 0 (vlan 1), which is used for communication between the
SAU and the OMU board in the BSC/RNC (defined as the internal network).
Figure 2-9 shows the mapping between the ETHxxx and the bondxxx on the ESAUa.

Figure 1.1 Mapping between the ETHxxx and the bondxxx on the ESAUa

F_ETH0, F_ETH1, and F_DBG are connected to the external network through the Ethernet ports on the
ESAUa panel. B_ETH0, B_ETH1, and B_UPDATE are connected to the backplane of the subrack, and
they are not displayed on the ESAUa panel.

2.3 Slot Planning


This section describes how to plan slots for the SAU. The SAU must be installed in slots that
meet the specific requirements for different NE versions.

SAUc Slot Planning


Each SAUc board occupies one slot. Table 2-9 describes the slot planning principles for
various NE versions.

Table 1.1 SAUc slot planning principles


NE Version Slot Planning Principle

BSC6900 V900R015 and later The SAUc board can be installed in the vacant
versions slots in MPS or EPS, except the following slots :
 MPS

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

NE Version Slot Planning Principle

− Slots 6 and 7: dedicated for SCUa or SCUb


− Slots 12 and 13: dedicated for GCUa
 EPS
Slots 6 and 7: dedicated for SCUa or SCUb

 The SAUc board must be installed in the lowest subrack of the cabinet for good heat dissipation.
 The SAUc is preferentially installed in the MPS and then the EPS.
 When the SAUc is installed in the MPS, if the MPS is reset, all the boards except the OMU and
SAUc will be reset. The services of the SAUc are not affected.
 When the SAUc is installed in the EPS, if the EPS is reset, all the boards except the SAUc will be
reset. The services of the SAUc are not affected.

ESAUa Slot Planning


Each ESAUa board occupies two slots. Table 2-10 describes the slot planning principles for
various NE versions.

Table 1.1 ESAUa slot planning principles


NE Versions Planning Principle

BSC6910 V100R015 and later The ESAUa board can only be installed in any slot
versions except those for the SCUb and GCUa/GCGa. You
are advised to insall the ESAUa in slots 0 and 1 in
the front of the subrack.

 The ESAUa must be installed in two adjacent even-odd slots that serve as active and standby slots.
 The ESAUa is preferentially installed in the MPS and then the EPS.
 When the ESAUa board is installed in the MPS, if the MPS is reset, the services of the ESAUa are
not affected.
 When the ESAUa board is installed in the EPS, if the EPS is reset, the services of the ESAUa are not
affected.

2.4 Software Architecture


This section describes the SAU software architecture.
An SAU system includes an SAU board and certain software. The software includes the
Dopra Linux operating system, SAU board management software, EMS service component
(optional), and EBC service component (optional). Figure 2-10 shows the SAU software
structure. Only one SAU board can be used for deploying the EBC and EMS service
components or either of them.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

Figure 1.2 SAU software structure

EBC Service Component


The EBC service component is optional and runs on the Dopra Linux operating system and
SAU board management software. It processes raw data and reports processed data to the
EBC. Table 2-11 describes processes for the EBC service component.

The service or process name may contain N, an integer greater than or equal to 0, which indicates that
multiple services or processes can be running concurrently. The number of concurrent services or
processes may vary according to server configurations to maximize system resource usage.

Table 1.1 Service processing processes


Service Process Description

RanSau.Controller RanSau.Controller Checkinging process, which processes


messages from external interfaces.
This service must be started.
Required service: none.
RanSau.Counter RanSau.Counter Data preprocessing process, which preprocesses
raw data.
This service must be started.
Required service: RanSau.Controller.
SysMonitor SysMonitor Checking process, which hecks disk space of
SAU blade.
This service must be started.
Required service: none.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

EMS Service Component


The EMS service component is optional and runs on the Dopra Linux operating system and
SAU board management software. It processes raw data and reports processed data to the
Trace Server. Table 2-12 describes processes for the EMS service component.

Table 1.1 Service processing processes


Service Process Description

RanSau.Controller RanSau.Controller Checking process, which processes messages


from external interfaces.
This service must be started.
Required service: none.
RanSau.TSNorthP RanSau.TSNorthP Data preprocessing process, which preprocesses
rocess rocess raw data.
This service must be started.
Required service: RanSau.Controller.
SysMonitor SysMonitor Checking process, which checks disk space of
SAU blade.
This service must be started.
Required service: none.

Board Management Software


The board management software provides software and hardware management, alarm
reporting, time zone management, and time check functions for SAUs. Table 2-13 describes
the processes provided by the board management software.

Table 1.1 Board management processes


Process Description

monitor Checks other board management processes.


sau_manager Checks board software and hardware and synchronizes time
zones.
host_gate Provides the function of internal communication with the OMU
process.
alarm Collects alarm information.
ftp_server Provides the FTP service for the OMU to upload data.
sntp Provides the time synchronization function.
data_server Collects data, manages certificates, and checks disks.
debug_log Manages SAU logs.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

2.5 Introduction to Active and Standby Workspaces of the


SAU
The active and standby workspaces of the SAU are used for upgrading and rolling back the
versions of the BAM platform and implements quick switches between BAM platform
versions.

Concepts of the Active and Standby Workspaces of the SAU


The active and standby workspaces of the SAU refer to the active and standby workspaces for
storing version files on the BAM platform. The workspaces are used to store files of different
versions.
The relationship between the active and standby workspaces is relative. The active/standby
relationship depends on the running version. The workspace that stores the running BAM
version file is the active workspace, and the other is the standby workspace.

Relationship Between the Active and Standby Workspaces of the SAU


The active and standby workspaces of the SAU are independent of each other. The operation
of the active workspace does not change any information in the standby workspace.

Working Principles of the Active/Standby Workspaces of the SAU


The working principles of the active and standby workspaces of the SAU in the case of the
SAU version upgrade are as follows:
 The standby workspace of the SAU is upgraded to a new version.
 A switchover is performed between the active and standby workspaces of the SAU. The
standby workspace that stores the new version becomes active, and the other workspace
becomes standby.
 The SAU runs the upgraded version.
 The SAU version upgrade is complete.
After the SAU version upgrade, the standby workspace of the SAU stores the old version. In
this case, version rollback can be performed as required. The working principles of the active
and standby workspaces in the case of version rollback are as follows:
 A switchover is performed between the active and standby workspaces of the SAU. The
running version is rolled back to the source version.
 The SAU runs the source version.
 The SAU version rollback is complete.

2.6 Precautions
This section describes the precautions. Relevant precautions must be followed to ensure the
proper operation of the SAU.
 The SAU can be installed with only the operating system software (including all
necessary driver programs and components) and the SAU applications.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

 The following operations are prohibited: deleting any directory, modifying the contents
and attributes of any system file, disabling the Ethernet adapter, and modifying the
configuration files of the Ethernet adapter.
 The information about both data pre-processing and fault generation is recorded in the
logs of the SAU. To timely and accurately locate and rectify faults, do not delete any log
file on the SAU.
 The unauthorized use of patches or upgrade versions may lead to unstable SAU
performance due to version incompatibility.
 If the NE version used with the SAU is earlier than BSC6900
V900R015C00SPH516/BSC6910 V100R015C00SPH516, only one SAU board where
the Nastar service component is deployed can be configured on the NE. The EBC and
EMS service components cannot be deployed on the SAU board.
 If the NE version used with SAU is BSC6900 V900R015C00SPH516/BSC6910
V100R015C00SPH516 or later, a maximum of two SAU boards can be configured on
the NE. One board is used for deploying the Nastar service component. The other board
is used for deploying the EBC or EMS service component or both.
 The SAUc must be used if the SAU is required for the BSC6900.The ESAUa must be
used if the SAU is required for the BSC6910.

2.7 SAU Installation and Maintenance Scenarios


This section describes how to install and maintain an SAU board.

SAU Installation and Maintenance Scenarios for the EBC


This section describes how to install and maintain an SAU for the EBC service component.

If... Then...

The new SAU board is used for Initially install and commission the SAU. For detailed
deploying the EBC service operations, see 3.1 Installing and Commissioning the
component SAU.
An SAU board running the EMS Perform operations by referring to 3.1.6.2 Installing
service component is available SAU Applications (for the EBC and EMS Service
onsite and the EBC service Components). In this case, installing the EBC service
component needs to be deployed component does not affect existing services.
on the SAU board
The operating system of the SAU Reinstall the operating system and SAU applications
breaks down on the SAU. For detailed operations, see 3.2
Reinstalling and Commissioning the SAU.
The EBC service component Uninstall the EBC service component by referring
cannot work properly and the 4.2.5 How Do I Uninstall SAU Applications?, and then
operating system settings of the manually reinstall the EBC service component by
SAU remain unchanged referring to 3.1.6.2 Installing SAU Applications (for
the EBC and EMS Service Components).

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide Introduction to the SAUIntroduction to the SAU

SAU Installation and Maintenance Scenarios for the EMS


This section describes how to install and maintain an SAU for the EMS service component.

If... Then...

The new SAU board is used for Install and commission the SAU. For detailed
deploying the EMS service operations, see 3.1 Installing and Commissioning the
component SAU.
An SAU board running the EBC Perform operations by referring to 3.1.6.2 Installing
service component is available SAU Applications (for the EBC and EMS Service
onsite and the EMS service Components). In this case, installing the EMS service
component needs to be deployed component does not affect existing services.
on the SAU board
The operating system of the SAU Reinstall the operating system and SAU applications
breaks down on the SAU. For detailed operations, see 3.2
Reinstalling and Commissioning the SAU.
The EMS service component Uninstall the EMS service component by referring
cannot work properly and the 4.2.5 How Do I Uninstall SAU Applications?, and then
operating system settings of the manually reinstall the EMS service component by
SAU remain unchanged referring to 3.1.6.2 Installing SAU Applications (for
the EBC and EMS Service Components).

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

3 SAU Operation Guide

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to install, commission, operate, or maintain the SAU.
3.1 Installing and Commissioning the SAU
This chapter describes how to install and commission the SAU. The operating system of the
SAU is installed before delivery. If the SAU is used for the first time, you need to install the
SAU board and SAU applications and set the IP address, mask, and gateway IP address of the
SAU Ethernet adapter according to the IP address planning at the site.
3.2 Reinstalling and Commissioning the SAU
This chapter describes how to reinstall the operating system. When the operating system of
the SAU is broken down at the site, you need to reinstall the operating system software and
SAU applications. The other operations are the same as those during the initial
commissioning.
3.3 Replace an SAU Board
This section describes how to replace a faulty SAU board. The SAU board is hot-swappable.
It takes about 16 minutes to replace the SAU board.
3.4 Operating and Maintaining the SAU
This chapter describes how to operate and maintain the SAU after it is installed. To perform
this task, you need to log in to the Linux operating system remotely or run MML commands.

3.1 Installing and Commissioning the SAU


This chapter describes how to install and commission the SAU. The operating system of the
SAU is installed before delivery. If the SAU is used for the first time, you need to install the
SAU board and SAU applications and set the IP address, mask, and gateway IP address of the
SAU Ethernet adapter according to the IP address planning at the site.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

3.1.1 SAU Installation Procedure During Initial Commissioning


This section describes how to install the SAU during initial commissioning so that you can
install and commission the SAU quickly.
Figure 3-1 shows the procedure for installing the SAU during the initial commissioning.

Figure 1.1 Procedure for installing the SAU during initial commissioning

Table 3-1 describes the operations of Figure 3-1.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Table 1.1 Description of SAU installation procedure during initial commissioning


No. Procedure Description

1 Preparing for the Check the settings of the SAU board before delivery,
Installation the availability of the application installation package,
the slot where the SAU board is to be installed, the IP
address, and the computer name.
2 Installing the SAU Install the SAU board to the specific slot. The operating
Board system is installed before delivery.
After the SAU board is installed, you need to connect
the SAU board to the switches by using network cables.
This ensures that the SAU board can communicate with
other components properly.
3 Logging In To the Log in to the SAU by using the debugging IP address of
SAU the SAU. The debugging IP address is set before
delivery.
4 Uploading the SAU Use the FileZilla software to upload the SAU
Applications applications to the SAU board.
5 Installing the SAU Install the SAU applications on the SAU board. Ensure
Applications that the Dopra Linux operating system is installed on
the SAU board.
6 Checking the Check the installation of the SAU applications by
Installation of the checking the SAU processes and installation directory.
SAU Applications
(for the EBC Service
Component)
Checking the
Installation of the
SAU Applications
(for the EMS Service
Component)
7 3.1.7.2 Changing the Change the external IP addresses according to actual
IP Address of the situations. In normal cases, do not change the
SAU (for the EBC or debugging IP and internal IP address.
EMS Service
Component)
8 Adding the SAU Run the ADD BRD command on the LMT to add the
Board data of the SAU board so that the BSC can identify the
SAU board.
9 Setting a Central Specify the SAU board where the EBC or EMS service
FTP Server component is installed as the FTP center.

After the preceding operations, you need to check that the SAU is installed and commissioned through
certain check items. For details, see 3.1.8 Checking the Installation and Commissioning of the SAU.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

3.1.2 Preparing for the Installation


This section describes how to prepare for the installation. Before commissioning or
reinstalling the SAU at the site, you must keep the following items ready: SAU board, PC,
and SAU software package. You must obtain the default fixed IP addresses of the internal and
external networks and the default debugging IP address from the SAU installation information
table. In addition, you must be clear about the slot of the SAU board and the fixed external IP
address that is available.

Related operations on the SAU do no have impact on other services. However, considering
the security, you are advised to perform related operations on the SAU at night.

Keeping the Hardware Ready


Before the installation, you must keep the hardware items ready, as shown in Table 3-2.

Table 1.1 Hardware required before installing the SAU


Hardware Description

SAU board Perform the following operations before installing the SAUc or
ESAUa board.
 If the SAUc or ESAUa needs to be installed or replaced,
keep a new board ready. For details about how to replace
the SAUc or ESAUa, see 3.3 Replace an SAU Board.
 If the operating system of the SAUc or ESAUa needs to be
reinstalled, ensure that the original SAUc or ESAUa
functions properly.
PC The PC helps users operate the SAU.
Ethernet cable  Keep the Ethernet cable ready before connecting the near end
to the SAU through the debugging port.
 Keep the Ethernet cable ready for connecting the SAU to the
switch.

Keeping the Software Ready


Before the installation, you need to contact Huawei technical support engineers to log in to
http://support.huawei.com and download the SAU application software package of the
required version and the tool software packages. Table 3-3 lists the detail information of the
software packages.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Before downloading the software, ensure that you have a user account at
http://support.huawei.com and you are authorized to download software packages. If you are
not authorized to download the packages, contact the website administrator to apply for the
rights.

Table 1.1 Software required for the installation


Software Description Downloading Path Application
Scenario

SAU SAU application Software > Carrier Software & Site initial
application software package Core Network > Core Network > commissioning
NMS Value-Added Services & and reinstallation
Tools > OSS > iManager M2000-
TOOL > iManager TOOL(OSS-
SAU)V100R001CXXSPCXXX
The software package name is
xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXXS
AU_PARC_X86_32_pkg.tar
Integrity Used to check the Huawei technical support is Site initial
check tool SAU software advised to log in to commissioning
for package integrity http://support.huawei.com and and reinstallation
software choose Search by Category >
packages Tools to obtain the software
package by typing the software
package name or keywords in
Keyword.
The software package name is
ipsi_signcli_suse10_X86_32_pkg
_2_0.tar
If multiple search results meet the
criteria, you are advised to obtain
the latest version.
PuTTY Used to log in to Tools > Mini-tool Software > Site initial
the SAU remotely Core Network Product Line > commissioning
Wireless-OSS > iManger M2000- and reinstallation
II > Public Tools
The software package name is
PuTTY.zip
FileZilla Used to transfer Tools > Mini-tool Software > Site initial
files Core Network Product Line > commissioning
Wireless-OSS > iManger M2000- and reinstallation
II > Public Tools
The software package name is
FileZilla.zip
Dopra_Lin Operating system Huawei technical support is Site reinstallation
ux_USB advised to log in to

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Software Description Downloading Path Application


Scenario

tool software package http://support.huawei.com and


package choose Search by Category >
Tools to obtain the software
package by typing the software
package name or keywords in
Keyword.
The software package name is
Dopra_Linux_USB Disks.zip
If multiple search results meet the
criteria, you are advised to obtain
the latest version.

Checking the IP Address Information


 You can obtain the fixed internal and external IP addresses and the debugging IP address
of the SAU by referring to ifconfig command. Ensure that the internal IP address for
SAU and that for OMU are on the same network segment.
 Check the IP address of the SAU on the existing network and the related gateway IP
addresses. You are advised to set the external IP address for the SAU and that for the
OMU on the same network segment.
For details about the IP addresses of the SAU and the principles of planning the IP addresses,
see 3.1.7.1 SAU IP Addresses and Planning Principles.

Check whether the onsite link mode of the LAN switch is auto-negotiation. If the link mode of the LAN
switch is not auto-negotiation, set the link mode by referring to 4.1.6 How Can I Set the Link Mode of
the External Ethernet Adapter of the SAU.

Planning Routes
Plan SAU route information in advance by referring to the OMU route planning on the live
network and ensure that the SAU can communicate properly with the Trace Server, SAU, and
U2000/M2000.

Preparing Ports on the Switches


For details about the SAU networking in a base station controller, see Networking of the SAU
in a Controller.
Prepare ports of the switches required by the SAU based on Table 3-4.

Table 1.1 Ports of switches required by the SAU


SAU Connection Number of Switches Number of Ports
Scenario Required by the SAU

The SAU is connected to a 1 Reserve two ports on the


single switch. switch.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

SAU Connection Number of Switches Number of Ports


Scenario Required by the SAU

The SAU is connected to 2 Reserve one port on each


two switches. switch.

Checking the OMU Information


You must run the DSP OMU command to check the OMU information used for installing the
SAU applications before the installation.
 Check the version of the OMU.
 Check the internal IP address of the OMU. Ensure that the internal IP address of the
OMU is xxx.xxx.3.40. If it is not xxx.xxx.3.40, contact NE personnel.

(Optional) Checking the SAU Information


If any SAU board has been installed on the live network, run DSP SAU to check SAU-related
information such as the subrack number, slot number, FTP center, and version number. The
information will be used during SAU installation.
The following is the command example when the SAU works with the BSC6900:
To query the information about the SAU, run the following command:
DSP SAU:;

%%DSP SAU:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

SAU server state


----------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Ftp Center = YES
Computer name = mbsc_C01_Upper
Internal network fixed IP = 172.16.5.64
External network fixed IP = 10.145.22.213
Operational state = Normal
Version = SAU VXXXRxXXCXXSPCXXX
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

3.1.3 Installing the SAU Board


SAU boards consist of the SAUc, and ESAUa. This section describes how to install the
SAUc, and ESAUa boards independently.

Context

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 The SAUc must be used if the SAU is required for the BSC6900.
 The ESAUa must be used if the SAU is required for the BSC6910.
 When you configure two SAU boards, you need to run the SET SAUCENTER command
to cancel the central FTP server setting of the first SAU board before installing the second
SAU board. This avoids the conflict between the default internal network IP address of the
second SAU board and the internal network IP address of the central FTP server. After you
install hardware and application software of the second SAU board, reconfigure the central
FTP server by referring to 3.1.7.4 Setting a Central FTP Server.
 If you cancel and reset the central FTP server, the SAU boards will fail to receive data
temporarily, affecting existing services. Therefore, you are advised to make preparations
and cancel and reset the the central FTP server at night.

3.1.3.1 Installing the SAUc Board in a Subrack


This section describes how to install the SAUc board in the specified slot of a subrack.

Prerequisites
 The tools used for installation are ready. The tools are as follows: ESD wrist strap,
Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box/bag.
 The SAUc board to be installed is ready.
 The power-on check is performed on the cabinet.
 The slot where the SAUc is to be installed is confirmed. For details, see 2.3 Slot
Planning.

Context

 Before performing the following operations, wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the
ground core of the wrist strap to the ESD jack on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap is
available or no proper location for grounding the wrist strap, wear the ESD gloves.
 When you configure two SAU boards, you need to run the SET SAUCENTER command
to cancel the central FTP server setting of the first SAU board before installing the second
SAU board. This avoids the conflict between the default internal network IP address of the
second SAU board and the internal network IP address of the central FTP server. After you
install hardware and application software of the second SAU board, reconfigure the central
FTP server by referring to 3.1.7.4 Setting a Central FTP Server.

Procedure
Step 1 Take out the SAUc board from the ESD box, and check the pins and socket of the board.
If any pin or socket is in an improper condition, contact Huawei technical support engineers.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Step 2 As shown in (1) of Figure 3-2, press the retaining springs on the front panel inwards and, at
the same time, raise the ejector levers of the front panel outwards to free the front panel from
the self-locking springs, and then continue to raise the ejector levers until they cannot be
raised, as shown in (2) of Figure 3-2.

Figure 2.1 Installing the SAUc board

Step 3 Hold the front panel with one hand and hold the lower edge of the board with the other hand,
and then insert the SAUc board into the subrack along the guide rail till the board fully fits
into the subrack and the ejector levers are partially closed.

Insert the board slowly and with balanced force to avoid damage to the pins on the back of the
board and the metal sheets in the slot touching the backplane in the slot.

Step 4 As shown in (3) of Figure 3-2, lower the ejector levers by an angle of about 60° so that the
ejector levers fix the self-locking springs tightly. At this time, the board is securely fixed to
the backplane, and the ejector levers are locked with the subrack tightly, as shown in (4) of
Figure 3-2.
Step 5 Press the captive screws inwards and fasten them clockwise to fix the SAUc board, as shown
in (4) of Figure 3-2.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

The springs of the captive screws on the ejector levers ensure that the captive screws can be tightened
with the screws on the subrack through the corresponding holes.

Step 6 Check whether the SAUc board can be powered on normally according to the LEDs on the
SAUc board.
Step 7 Use the Ethernet cable to connect the switch to the ETH0 port and the ETH1 port of the SAUc
board.
Connect the switch connected to the OMU to the ETH0 port and the ETH1 port of the SAUc
and ensure that the SAUc and switch are in the same external VLAN.

Ensure the ETH0 port and the ETH1 port are connected by the Ethernet cable to the external
VLAN. If not, the SAU will generate the alarm named the SAU hardware fault. For details,
see section 6.1 Alarm List.

----End

3.1.3.2 Installing the ESAUa Board


This section describes how to install the ESAUa board in the specified slot of a subrack.

Prerequisites
 The tools used for installation are ready. The tools are as follows: ESD wrist strap,
Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box/bag.
 The ESAUa board to be installed is ready.
 The power-on check is performed on the cabinet.
 The slots for housing the board have been determined. For details, see 2.3 Slot Planning.

Context

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 Before performing the following operations, wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the
ground core of the wrist strap to the ESD jack on the cabinet. If no ESD wrist strap is
available or no proper location for grounding the wrist strap, wear the ESD gloves.
 When installing ESAUa board, use a 5 x 200 screwdriver with a long handle. The
screwdriver uses type No.1 bit, it is 200 mm (7.87 in.) long in total, and the diameter of
the bit is 5 mm (0.17 in.).
 When you configure two SAU boards, you need to run the SET SAUCENTER command
to cancel the central FTP server setting of the first SAU board before installing the second
SAU board. This avoids the conflict between the default internal network IP address of the
second SAU board and the internal network IP address of the central FTP server. After you
install hardware and application software of the second SAU board, reconfigure the central
FTP server by referring to 3.1.7.4 Setting a Central FTP Server.

Procedure
Step 1 Take out the ESAUa board from the ESD box, and check the pins and socket of the board.
If any pin or socket is in an improper condition, contact Huawei technical support engineers.
Step 2 As shown in a of Figure 3-3, press and hold the two locking buttons on the ejector levers, flip
outward the ejector levers, and rotate them to the extreme until they are in the position shown
in (2) of Figure 3-3.
Step 3 Hold the front panel with one hand and hold the lower edge of the board with the other hand,
and then insert the board into the subrack along the guide rail till the board fully fits into the
subrack and the ejector levers are partially closed, as shown in (3) of Figure 3-3.

Insert the board slowly and with balanced force to avoid damage to the pins on the back of the
board and the metal sheets in the slot touching the backplane in the slot.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Figure 3.1 Installing the ESAUa board

Step 4 Turn the two ejector levers on the board inward until they are in full contact with the panel, as
shown in (4) of Figure 3-3.
Step 5 Ensure that the two ejector levers hook on to the self-locking latches on the front panel, and
use a screwdriver to tighten captive screws clockwise, as shown in b of Figure 3-3.

The springs of the screws on the ejector levers ensure that the screws can be tightened on the subrack
through the corresponding holes.

Step 6 Check whether the ESAUa board is powered on normally by referring to LEDs on the ESAUa
board.
Step 7 Use Ethernet cables to connect ETH0 and ETH1 on the ESAUa to the switch.
Connect ETH0 and ETH1 on the ESAUa to the switch that is connected to the OMU and
ensure that the ESAUa and switch are in the same external VLAN.

Do connect ETH0 and ETH1 to the external network; otherwise, an SAU hardware fault
alarm will arise. For details, see 6 Appendix B: SAU Fault Alarm Reference.

----End

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU


This section describes how to log in to the SAU. You can connect the PC to the SAU, and
then log in to the SAU using Secure Shell (SSH) (for example, using PuTTY) on the PC.
Afterwards, you can perform operation and maintenance on the SAU.

Prerequisites
You have obtained the external IP address or debugging IP address of the SAU.
 For details about the default IP address plan during SAU board delivery, see List for the
SAU Software Configurations Before Delivery.
 (Required when the IP address is changed) You have obtained the new IP address from
the field administrator.

Context
 OS hardening has been performed for SAU boards before delivery.
 After OS hardening is performed, do not remotely log in to the SAU as user root.
Instead, you have to log in to the SAU as user lgnusr and then run the su - root
command to switch to user root.

You need to run all the commands and perform all operations described in this document as user root.
User lgnusr is only used to log in to the SAU.

Procedure
 Commissioning During Initial Installation and Reinstallation
1. Use a cable to connect the PC to the port for commissioning (ETH2) of the SAU.
2. Set the IP address of the PC to be on the same network segment as the debugging IP
address of the SAU. The default debugging IP address of the SAU is 192.168.6.50 and
the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
3. On the PC, open the SSH client (for example, PuTTY) and type the debugging IP
address of the SAU.
4. Log in to the SAU as the operating system user lgnusr.
For details about the user name and password plan, see 7.3 User Names and Initial User
Passwords.
5. Run the su - root command and press Enter. Then, type the password of user root to
switch to user root.
 Routine Operation and Maintenance
1. Use a network device to connect the PC and he ETH0 or ETH1 port of the SAU board.
2. On the PC, open the SSH client (for example, PuTTY) and type the external IP address
of the SAU.
3. Log in to the SAU as the operating system user lgnusr.
For details about the user name and password plan, see 7.3 User Names and Initial User
Passwords.
4. Type the su - root command and press Enter. Then, type the password of user root to
switch to user root.
----End

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Follow-up Procedure
Exit the SAU after you have completed the operation and maintenance on the SAU using
PuTTY on your PC.
1. Type exit and press Enter to exit PuTTY.

3.1.5 Checking OS Hardening


This section describes how to check OS hardening on the SAU. OS hardening is generally
performed before SAU delivery.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the SAU based on 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.

If you can only log in to the SAU board as a user other than user root, such as user lgnusr, and then run
the su - root command to switch to user root, OS hardening has been performed on the SAU board.
Otherwise, OS hardening has not been performed. If this occurs, contact Huawei technical support.

----End

3.1.6 Installing the SAU Software


This chapter describes how to install the SAU software. After the operating system is installed
on the SAU board, you need to install SAU applications on the SAU board. The SAU
applications can pre-process the original data.

3.1.6.1 Uploading the SAU Application Package


This section describes how to upload the SAU application package to the SAU board before
installing the SAU applications.

Prerequisites
You have obtained the SAU application package, see 3.1.2 Preparing for the Installation.

Context
This section assumes that the SAU application package is stored in the local directory
D:\xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXX.
The name of the SAU application package:
xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXXSAU_PARC_X86_32_pkg.tar

Procedure
Step 1 Create the folder xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXX in the root directory of disk D on the local
PC, and store the installation package
xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXXSAU_PARC_X86_32_pkg.tar in the folder.
Step 2 Log in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Step 3 Run the following command as user root to check whether the /mbsc/upgrade directory
exists.
# ls /mbsc/upgrade/

If a message is displayed stating that the file or directory does not exist, proceed to Step 4 to
create the directory. If the directory exists, the system automatically goes to Step 5.
Step 4 Run the following command as user root to create the /mbsc/upgrade directory.
# mkdir -p /mbsc/upgrade

Step 5 Use FileZilla to upload the xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXX folder containing the SAU
application package to the SAU board.
For details about how to use FileZilla, see 4.2.1 How Do I Use FileZilla to Transfer Files?.

If... Then...

You can directly log in to the SAU board as OS hardening has not performed on the
user root SAU board.
The configuration information required for
uploading the files is as follows:
 User and password: root and its password
 Folder to be uploaded:
xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXX
 Directory of files on the SAU board:
/mbsc/upgrade
You can only log in to the SAU board as a OS hardening generally has been performed
user other than user root, such as user on the SAU board.
lgnusr, and then run the su - root command You need to set the following information
to switch to user root when uploading files and continue to
perform Step 6 after the upload is complete.
 User and password: lgnusr and its
password
 Folder to be uploaded:
xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXX
 Directory of files on the SAU board:
/home/lgnusr

Step 6 If you upload files to the /home/lgnusr directory as user lgnusr, run the following commands
as user root to move the folder containing the SAU application program to the
/mbsc/upgrade directory:
# cd /home/lgnusr/

# mv xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXX /mbsc/upgrade/
----End

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

3.1.6.2 Installing SAU Applications (for the EBC and EMS Service
Components)
You can install different service components on the SAU board by selecting related
parameters during the SAU application installation. This section describes how to install EBC
and EMS service components.

Prerequisites

The SAU works with BSC6900 V900R015C00SPH516/BSC6910 V100R015C00SPH516 and


later versions and the EBC/EMS service component needs to be installed.

 You have checked the version of the operating system of the SAU. For details, see 3.4.1
Checking the Version of the Operating System.
 You have uploaded the SAU application package to the SAU board. For details, see
3.1.6.1 Uploading the SAU Application Package.
 You have obtained the language information about the U2000/M2000.

Context
 The default installation directory of the EBC service component is /opt/ebcsau after the
SAU applications are installed. You are not allowed to change this directory.
 The default installation directory of the EMS service component is /opt/emssau after the
SAU applications are installed . You are not allowed to change this directory.
 Only one SAU board can be used for deploying the EBC and EMS service components
or either of them.

Procedure
Step 1 Install the integrity check tool for the SAU application package. For details, see 4.2.6 How
Can I Install the Integrity Check Tool for Installation Packages.
Step 2 Log in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.
Step 3 Run the following command to query information about the service components that have
been installed on the SAU board. Record the information.
# ls /opt

If the system output contains ebcsau or emssau, the EBC service component or EMS
service component has been installed on the SAU board.
Step 4 Switch to the directory where the SAU application package is stored.
Assume that the SAU application package is stored in the
/mbsc/upgrade/xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXX directory. Type the following command and
press Enter:
# cd /mbsc/upgrade/xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXX

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Step 5 Run the following command to check the SAU application package integrity:
# /opt/signtool/verifyPkgSign
xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXXSAU_PARC_X86_32_pkg.tar

 If the command output contains SignCLI Info: Successfully verified, the package is
intact.
 If the command output contains fail or error, the SAU application package integrity fails to be
verified. If this occurs, contact Huawei technical support.
 If the command output contains /opt/signtool/verifyPkgSign: No such file or directory, the
integrity check tool has not been installed. You must install the integrity check tool before checking
the SAU application package integrity. For details, see 4.2.6 How Can I Install the Integrity Check
Tool for Installation Packages.

Step 6 Run the following command to decompress the SAU application package:
# tar xzf xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXXSAU_PARC_X86_32.tar.gz
Step 7 Run the following commands to modify the owner of the files and the folders.
# chown -R root:root xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXXSAU*
Step 8 Run the following commands to execute the install_oss.sh script, and press Enter.
# cd xSAUV100R001CXXSPCXXXSAU
# ./install_oss.sh

Step 9 When the following information is displayed, select the required upper-layer applications
based on the information queried in Step 3 and site requirements:
Please input the application which you want to access:
1. ebc
2. ems

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 The SAU application package contains service components and board management software.
 When installing the first service component, the system prompts you to enter the required NE
information and install the board management software (as described in Step 10 through Step 15).
 When installing the second service component on the same SAU board, the system only installs the
service component and does not install the board management software. In addition, the system does
not prompts for the required NE information.

If... Then...

No service component has been 1. Type 1 to select ebc.


installed on the SAU board and 2. Perform Step 10 through Step 15 to install the
only the EBC service component board management software and EBC service
needs to be installed onsite component.

No service component has been 1. Type 2 to select ems.


installed on the SAU board and 2. Perform Step 10 through Step 15 to install the
only the EMS service component board management software and EMS service
needs to be installed onsite component.

No service component has been 1. Type 1 to select ebc.


installed on the SAU board and 2. Perform Step 10 through Step 15 to install the
the EBC and EMS service board management software and EBC service
components need to be installed component.
onsite 3. Repeat Step 8 and type 2 to select ems. The
system starts installing the EMS service
component.
The EBC service component has 1. Type 2 to select ems. The system starts
been installed on the SAU board installing the EMS service component.
and the EMS service component
also needs to be installed onsite

The EMS service component has 1. Type 1 to select ebc. The system starts
been installed on the SAU board installing the EBC service component.
and the EBC service component
also needs to be installed onsite

The EBC and EMS service No further installation operation is required.


components have been installed
on the SAU board

Step 10 When the following information is displayed, selected a required NE and press Enter.
For example, to select a BSC6910, type 1.
The command output is as follows:
Please Choose Supported Product Type:
Index Product Type
0 BSC6900
1 BSC6910
Please Input Index:

Step 11 When the following information is displayed, type a RAT index and press Enter.
For example, to select UMTS, type 1.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

The command output is as follows:


Please Choose Supported System Type:
Index System Type
0 GSM
1 UMTS
2 GU
Please Input Index:

Step 12 When the following information is displayed, type an OMU version index and press Enter.
For example, to select V100R015, type 0.
The command output is as follows:
Please Choose Supported OMU Version:
Index OMU Version
0 V100R015
1 V100R016
2 V100R017

Please Input Index:

Step 13 When the following information is displayed, type a patch version range index and press
Enter.
The command output is as follows:
Please Choose V100R015 Supported Patch:
Index Patch No.
0 between C00(include) and C00SPH516(exclude)
1 C00SPH516 and Later
2 C01 and Later

Please Input Index:

Step 14 When the following information is displayed, type the language information and press Enter:
The command output is as follows:
# The SAU language version. eg: eng/chs
Please input a valid version :

The language of the SAU must be the same as that of the U2000/M2000. Otherwise, MML
commands will fail to be parsed.

Step 15 When the following information is displayed, type Y (case insensitive). The system starts
installing SAU applications.
The command output is as follows:
Please affirm input information. input Y to continue; input E to exit. ->

When the following information is displayed, the SAU applications are installed successfully.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Install SAU for ebc successfully.

Or
Install SAU for ems successfully.

 If you have reinstalled the SAU after uninstalling the SAU application software and BAM
platform and you have changed the internal network segment of the SAU board, the
network segment for the changed internal IP address of the SAU is automatically restored
to the default internal network segment.
 In this case, you need to change the internal network segment of the SAU board by
referring to 4.1.5 How Do I Ensure Normal Communication Between the SAU and OMU
When the OMU's Internal Network Segment Changes to ensure that the network segment
is consistent with the internal network segment of the OMU.

----End

3.1.6.3 Checking the Installation of the SAU Applications (for the EBC
Service Component)
This section describes how to check the installation of the SAU applications. The default
installation directory of the EBC service component in the SAU application software package
is /opt/ebcsau. The following items are stored in the installation directory of the SAU
applications: the SAU application components and data used or generated during operations.
In addition, you can check the installation of the SAU applications through the progress bar.

Prerequisites
 The SAU applications are installed on the SAU server (for details, see 3.1.6.2 Installing
SAU Applications (for the EBC and EMS Service Components)).
 You have logged in to the SAU server (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).

Procedure
Step 1 Start SAU processes, including the SAU service processing processes and board management
processes.
Run the following commands and then press Enter.
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh

# sau4ebc_start
Step 2 Check the status of the SAU processes.
1. Run the following commands to check the status of the SAU service processing
processes and then press Enter.
# cd /opt/ebcsau

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_ps
The last line in the command result is [Not Running : n].

If ... Then ...

The value of n is 0 The SAU service processing processes run


properly.
The value of n is not 0 The SAU service processing processes run
abnormally and the SAU applications fail to
be installed. You need to uninstall the SAU
and then install it again.

2. Run the following command to check the status of the board management processes and
then press Enter.
# /etc/rc.d/saud status

If ... Then ...

The status of the processes in the displayed The board management processes run
information are running properly and the SAU applications are
installed successfully.
The status of the processes in the displayed The board management processes run
information are unused or another status abnormally and the SAU applications fail to
be installed. You need to uninstall the SAU
and then install it again.

Step 3 Check the installation directory of the SAU applications.


Run the following command and then press Enter.
# cd /opt/ebcsau

# ll
Table 3-5 lists the main subfolders of the SAU applications.

Table 1.1 Main subfolders of the SAU applications


Directory Description

/3rdTools Stores third-party tools.


/bin Stores the command line tools and scripts provided by
the SAU.
/data Stores the collected files and temporary files during
the running of the SAU.
/etc Stores the configuration file. You are advised to use
the directory to save only static data, that is, the
configuration file that is not changed during the

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Directory Description

running of the SAU.


/lib Stores library files.
/var Stores the running logs of the SAU.
/script Stores SAU script files.
/data/common/datasource Stores the raw data collected by the SAU software.
/data/common/datafile Stores the preprocessed files.
/data/version_a/config/sysconfig Stores the configuration files of the SAU system.
or  If the workspace of the SAU is version_a, the
/data/version_b/config/sysconfig directory is /data/version_a/config/sysconfig.
 If the workspace of the SAU is version_b, the
directory is /data/version_b/config/sysconfig.
NOTE
You can query the active workspace of the SAU by one of the
following methods:
 Run the command on SAU:
# cat /mbsc/bam/common/reg.ini|grep bamarea|sed -e
"s/bamarea//"|sed -e "s/=//"
 Log in to the LMT, run the MML command DSP
SAUAREA to query the active workspace of the SAU.

----End

3.1.6.4 Checking the Installation of the SAU Applications (for the EMS
Service Component)
This section describes how to check the installation of the SAU applications. The default
installation directory of the EMS service component in the SAU application software package
is /opt/emssau. The following items are stored in the installation directory of the SAU
applications: the SAU application components and data used or generated during operations.
In addition, you can check the installation of the SAU applications through the progress bar.

Prerequisites
 The SAU applications are installed on the SAU server (for details, see 3.1.6.2 Installing
SAU Applications (for the EBC and EMS Service Components)).
 You have logged in to the SAU server (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).

Procedure
Step 1 Start SAU processes, including the SAU service processing processes and board management
processes.
Run the following commands and then press Enter.
# cd /opt/emssau

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start

Step 2 Check the status of the SAU processes.


1. Run the following commands to check the status of the SAU service processing
processes and then press Enter.
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_ps
The last line in the command result is [Not Running : n].

If ... Then ...

The value of n is 0 The SAU service processing processes run


properly.
The value of n is not 0 The SAU service processing processes run
abnormally and the SAU applications fail to
be installed. You need to uninstall the SAU
and then install it again.

2. Run the following command to check the status of the board management processes and
then press Enter.
# /etc/rc.d/saud status

If ... Then ...

The status of the processes in the displayed The board management processes run
information are running properly and the SAU applications are
installed successfully.
The status of the processes in the displayed The board management processes run
information are unused or another status abnormally and the SAU applications fail to
be installed. You need to uninstall the SAU
and then install it again.

Step 3 Check the installation directory of the SAU applications.


Run the following command and then press Enter.
# cd /opt/emssau

# ll
Table 3-6 lists the main subfolders of the SAU applications.

Table 1.1 Main subfolders of the SAU applications


Directory Description

/3rdTools Stores third-party tools.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Directory Description

/bin Stores the command line tools and scripts provided


by the SAU.
/data Stores the collected files and temporary files during
the running of the SAU.
/etc Stores the configuration file. You are advised to use
the directory to save only static data, that is, the
configuration file that is not changed during the
running of the SAU.
/lib Stores library files.
/var Stores the running logs of the SAU.
/script Stores SAU script files.
/data/common/datasource Stores the raw data collected by the SAU software.
/data/common/datafile Stores the preprocessed files.
/data/version_a/config/sysconfig or Stores the configuration files of the SAU system.
/data/version_b/config/sysconfig  If the workspace of the SAU is version_a, the
directory is /data/version_a/config/sysconfig.
 If the workspace of the SAU is version_b, the
directory is /data/version_b/config/sysconfig.
NOTE
You can query the active workspace of the SAU by one of
the following methods:
 Run the command on SAU:
# cat /mbsc/bam/common/reg.ini|grep bamarea|sed -e
"s/bamarea//"|sed -e "s/=//"
 Log in to the LMT, run the MML command DSP
SAUAREA to query the active workspace of the SAU.

----End

3.1.7 Commissioning the SAU


This chapter describes how to commission the SAU. After the installation of the SAU
applications, you need to commission the SAU to ensure that the SAU can properly
communication with the internal network and external network.

3.1.7.1 SAU IP Addresses and Planning Principles


This section describes the SAU IP addresses and planning principles. The Ethernet adapters of
the SAU must comply with the planning principles.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

IP Addresses of the SAU


The IP addresses consist of the internal and external fixed IP addresses and the debugging IP
addresses. Table 3-7 describes the IP addresses of the SAU.

Table 1.1 Description of IP addresses


IP Address Definition and Function Logical Name of the
Corresponding
Ethernet Adapter

Fixed internal IP address for the communication of the vlan1


IP address SAU in the internal network segment. It is
used for the communication between the
SAU and other boards.
This IP address is configured for the
internal Ethernet adapter team during the
installation of the operating system.
Fixed external IP address for the communication of the bond1
IP address SAU in the external network segment. It is
used for the communication between the
SAU and the EBC, and Trace Server in the
external network segment.
This IP address is configured for the
external Ethernet adapter team during the
installation of the operating system.
Debugging IP IP address for locally maintaining the SAU. bond2
address

Principles of Planning SAU IP Addresses


You must plan and set IP addresses for the SAU by adhering to the principles in Table 3-8.
 You can run the ifconfig command to obtain the default IP addresses of the SAU.
 You need to record the new fixed internal and external IP addresses in the SAU software
installation information table.
 When the NE version used with the SAU is BSC6900 V900R017C00SPC500, BSC6910
V100R017C00SPC500, or later, plan the external IP addresses and other addresses for
the SAU in compliance with the following principles:
− Definitions of the subnet number (SUBNET) and extended subnet number
(EXSUBNET): If the internal IP address is 172.16.5.7, the subnet number and
extended subnet number are 172 and 16, respectively.
− If the extended subnet number of the internal network is 168, the internal subnet
number is exclusively used by the internal network and cannot be used by external
and other networks. If the internal IP address is xxx.168.5.5, the xxx network
segment is exclusively used by the internal network and cannot be used by external
and other networks.
− If the extended subnet number of the internal network is not 168 and the NE used
with the SAU is BSC6900, the network segments used by the internal subnet are

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

SUBNET.EXSUBNET, SUBNET.(EXSUBNET+1), SUBNET.(EXSUBNET+2),


SUBNET.(EXSUBNET+3), and SUBNET.(EXSUBNET+4). These network
segments cannot be used by external and other networks. For example, if the internal
IP address is 172.16.5.5, the network segments used by the internal subnet are
172.16, 172.17, 172.18, 172.19, and 172.20. These network segments cannot be used
by external and other networks.
− If the extended subnet number of the internal network is not 168 and the NE used
with the SAU is BSC6910, the network segments used by the internal subnet are
SUBNET.EXSUBNET and SUBNET.(EXSUBNET+1). These network segments
cannot be used by external and other networks. For example, if the internal IP address
is 172.16.5.5, the network segments used by the internal subnet are 172.16 and
172.17. These network segments cannot be used by external and other networks.

Table 1.1 Principles of planning SAU IP addresses


IP Number Planning Principle Impact upon Change
Add of IP
ress Addresses
to Be
Planned

Fixe One  The default internal IP address of All the IP addresses for the
d the SAU is 80.168.3.250 before internal network are centrally
inter delivery. During the startup of planned, and therefore the
nal the SAU, the system calculates a fixed internal IP address is
IP new internal IP address based on not allowed to be changed.
addr the existing internal network Otherwise, the IP address for
ess segment and then changes the the SAU will conflict with
internal IP address of the SAU to the IP address for the OMU,
the new one. and therefore the
If the NE version used with the communication between the
SAU is earlier than BSC6900 SAU and the OMU fails.
V900R017C00SPC500/BSC691
0V100R017C00SPC500, or SAU
version is earlier than
V100R001C00SPC330, when
the system automatically
calculates the IP address, the
existing internal network
segment is not changed, for
example, xxx.yyy of the
xxx.yyy.3.250.
If the NE version used with the
SAU is BSC6900
V900R017C00SPC500/BSC691
0V100R017C00SPC500 or later,
and the SAU version is
V100R001C00SPC330 or later,
when the SAU software is
started, the system automatically
calculates and changes the last
two digits of the internal IP
address. The system also
automatically synchronizes the

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

IP Number Planning Principle Impact upon Change


Add of IP
ress Addresses
to Be
Planned

first two digits of the internal IP


address of the OMU on the live
network, which means that the
system automatically
synchronizes the internal
network segment of the OMU to
that of the SAU.
Fixe One The fixed external IP address is set If the fixed external IP
d to 172.121.139.201 (255.255.255.0) address is changed, the
exter by default. device that is connected to
nal Change the fixed external IP address the SAU through fixed
IP based on the actual networking external IP address cannot
addr condition and ensure that the fixed access the SAU, and the
ess external IP address is on the same device can access the SAU
network segment as the LAN of the only after it re-sets up a
equipment room and the IP address connection with the SAU
does not conflict with others. You using the changed IP
also need to set the external network address.
gateway and ensure that the network
segment of the external network
gateway is the same as that of the
fixed external IP address and IP
address conflict does not exist.
Debu One The debugging IP address is set to If the fixed external IP
ggin 192.168.6.50 (255.255.255.0) by address is changed, the
g IP default. device that is connected to
addr The debugging IP address must be the SAU through debugging
ess different from any other IP address IP address cannot access the
on the network. If it is identical with SAU, and the device can
another one, you must change it. access the SAU only after it
re-sets up a connection with
the SAU using the changed
IP address.

3.1.7.2 Changing the IP Address of the SAU (for the EBC or EMS Service
Component)
This section describes how to change the IP address, masks, and gateway IP addresses of the
SAU Ethernet adapter by using the omutool. All the information about the IP address can only
be changed with the permission of field engineers.

Prerequisites
 The SAU applications are installed on the SAU server (for details, see 3.1.6.2 Installing
SAU Applications (for the EBC and EMS Service Components)).

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).
 The planned IP address is obtained.

Procedure
Step 1 Stop SAU processes.

If both EBC and EMS service components are deployed on the SAU board, their processes must be
stopped.

If the service component Then...


is...

EBC 1. Run the following command to stop SAU service


processing processes (for the EBC service
component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop
If the command output contains All processes
have been stopped successfully!, it
indicates that all service processes are stopped.
Otherwise, run the sau4ebc_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop the board
management processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
3. Check whether all the SAU processes have been
stopped by referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of
SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component).
EMS 1. Run the following command to stop SAU service
processing processes (for the EMS service
component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop
If the command output contains All processes
have been stopped successfully!, it
indicates that all service processes are stopped.
Otherwise, run the sau4ems_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop the board
management processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
3. Check whether all the SAU processes have been
stopped by referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status
of SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component).

Step 2 Start the omutool.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

1. Switch the current directory to the directory where the omutool is saved.
Assume that the active workspace of the SAU is in /mbsc/bam/version_a. Run the
following command, and then press Enter:
# cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam

You can query the active workspace of the SAU by one of the following methods:
 Run the command in the SAU: cat /mbsc/bam/common/reg.ini|grep bamarea|sed -e
"s/bamarea//"|sed -e "s/=//".
 Log in to the LMT, run the MML command DSP SAUAREA to query the active workspace of the
SAU.
2. Run the following command to start the omutool and display parameter information
about the omutool:
# ./omutool

Step 3 Run the following command to change the fixed external IP addresses, masks, and gateway IP
addresses, and then press Enter.
# ./omutool extercard IP address mask gateway IP address
For example,
# ./omutool extercard 10.161.10.100 255.255.255.0 10.161.10.1

 You are advised to set the external IP address for the SAU and that for the OMU on the same
network segment.
 To change the IP addresses of the SAU, you must follow the principle of IP address planning by
referring to 3.1.7.1 SAU IP Addresses and Planning Principles. When entering the command, ensure
that there is a space between the IP address and the mask.
If a dialog box stating change gateway failed,because File exists is displayed, the changed IP
address is identical with that before the change.
 The changed IP addresses are recorded in 7.1 Data Sheet of SAU Software Installation Information.
 You can also run the ./omutool gateway gateway IP address command to change the gateway IP
address.

Step 4 Check whether the IP address is changed successfully.


 Run the ifconfig bond1 command to check the IP address.
# ifconfig bond1
The inet addr is the IP address, and the Mask is the subnet mask in the results.
 Run the route command to check the gateway IP address.
# route -nv
 Use PuTTY to log in to the SAU using the new IP address. If the login succeeds, the IP
address is changed successfully.
Step 5 Start the SAU processes to make the parameters take effect.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

If the service component Then...


is ...

EBC 1. Run the following commands to start SAU processes,


including the SAU service processing processes and
board management processes (for the EBC service
component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_start
2. Check whether all the SAU processes have been
started by referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of
SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component).
EMS 1. Run the following commands to start SAU processes,
including the SAU service processing processes and
board management processes (for the EMS service
component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start
2. Check whether all the SAU processes have been
started by referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status of
SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component).

----End

Follow-up Procedure
 Ensure that the IP address of the SAU has been set properly on U2000/M2000.
1. Log in to the U2000/M2000 client and open the topology view.
2. Right-click the base station controller and choose properties from the shortcut menu. In
the displayed dialog box, check that the IP address of the SAU has been set properly.
− If a single SAU board is configured, the IP address of the SAU is set to the external
IP address of the SAU.
− If two SAU boards are configured, the IP address of the SAU is set to the external IP
address of the SAU board that has been set to the central FTP server.

For details about how to check and configure NE attributes on the U2000/M2000, see the U2000/M2000
online help.
 You do not need to change the internal network segment and debugging IP address of the
SAU except in the following conditions.
− If the internal network segment of the OMU has been changed, then the internal
network segment of the SAU need to be changed. For detailed operations, see 4.1.5
How Do I Ensure Normal Communication Between the SAU and OMU When the
OMU's Internal Network Segment Changes.
− In consideration of security, if the default debugging IP address conflicts with the IP
address on the existing network, you need to change the debugging IP address.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Before changing the debugging IP address, you need to check whether the default debugging IP address
of the SAU conflicts with the IP address on the existing network by querying the debugging IP address
of the OMU. For details, consult the operators or read relevant OMU materials.
Type the following command and then press Enter.
# cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam
# ./omutool debugcard IP address
For example,
# ./omutool debugcard 192.168.6.60

3.1.7.3 Adding an SAU Board


This section describes how to add an SAU board. You can run the ADD BRD command on
the LMT to add the data of an SAU board so that the base station controller can recognize the
SAU board.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ADD BRD command to add an SAU board.
Step 2 Run the DSP SAU command to check the result of adding the SAU board.
 If you can query the information of the SAU, the adding operation is successful.
 If you can not query the information of the SAU, the adding operation is unsuccessful.
----End

3.1.7.4 Setting a Central FTP Server


This section describes how to set an SAU board as a central FTP server after SAU boards are
added when the SAU works with BSC6900 V900R015C00SPH516, BSC6910
V100R015C00SPH516, or a later version.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT.

Context

If two SAU boards are deployed onsite, set the SAU board where the EBC/EMS service component is
installed as the central FTP server. This is because the EBC/EMS service component has higher time
requirements.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the DSP SAU command to know the Subrack No. and Slot No. of SAU board.
Run the DSP SAU command directly, and do not set the parameters.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Step 2 Optional: Log in to the SAU by referring to 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU, and run the ls /opt
command to query information about the service component that has been installed on the
SAU board.
Step 3 Perform the following operations as required.

If... Then...

There is only one SAU board at the Run the SET SAUCENTER command to set
site the SAU board as the central FTP server.

There are two SAU boards at the Run the following operations to set the SAU
site board where the EBC/EMS service component
is installed as the central FTP serve:
1. If the another SAU board other than SAU
board where the EBC/EMS service
component is installed has been set to the
central FTP server, run the SET
SAUCENTER command to cancel the
setting.
2. Run the SET SAUCENTER command to
set the SAU board where the EBC/EMS
service component is installed to the central
FTP server.
NOTICE
During the change of the central FTP server for the
SAU, the SAU board will fail to receive data for a
short period of time.

----End

3.1.8 Checking the Installation and Commissioning of the SAU


This section describes how to check SAU installation and commissioning. You can check
whether the network connection of the SAU is proper and whether the SAU can obtain data
reported from an NE. If yes, the SAU is installed and commissioned successfully. If no,
contact Huawei technical support.

Prerequisites
You have installed and commissioned the SAU.

Procedure
 Check SAU installation and commissioning.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

If you need to... Then...

Check SAU 1. Log in to the SAU using the external IP address. For details, see the
processes operations in the routine operation and maintenance scenario
specified in 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.
2. Check the status of SAU processes by referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking
the Status of SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component) or
3.4.10.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for the EMS
Service Component).
Verify that 1. Log in to the SAU using the external IP address.
communication 2. Run the ping command to check that communication is proper
is proper between the SAU and EBC, and Trace Server (EMS service
between the component).
SAU and the # ping EBC/Trace Server external IP address
EBC, and Trace
Server (EMS
service
component)

Verify that 1. Log in to the SAU using the external IP address.


communication 2. Run the ping command to check that communication is proper
is proper between the SAU and the OMU:
between the # ping OMU Internal IP Address
SAU and the
OMU

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

If you need to... Then...

Check whether  For the EBC service component


the SAU can Ensure that the SAU processes have been started and the
properly U2000/M2000 EBC has enabled the subscription switch. Wait for
obtain data about 30 minutes, and then perform the following operations:
reported from
NOTE
an NE
When the SAU works with RNCs or GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station
controllers, you can run the MML command LST UMMEVENTCHRCTRL to
query the NE subscription switch status.
1. Log in to the SAU using the external fixed IP address.
2. Navigate to the directory for saving the raw data files of the
SAU, and then check whether there is any data reported by the
NE.
If there is data in the directory, the SAU can properly receive
data reported from an NE.
# cd /opt/ebcsau/data/common/datasource
 For the EMS service component
Ensure that the SAU processes have been started, and the upper-
layer applications (for example, the SONMaster and PRS) have
enabled the subscription switch through the U2000/M2000 and
have issued the subscription command to the OMU. Wait for about
20 minutes, and then perform the following operations:
1. Log in to the SAU using the external fixed IP address.
2. Navigate to the directory for saving the raw data files of the
SAU, and then check whether there is any data reported by the
NE.
If there is data in the directory, the SAU can properly receive
data reported from an NE.
# cd /opt/emssau/data/common/datasource

Check whether Run the LST SAUCENTER command to check that the SAU board
the SAU board where the EBC/EMS service component is deployed has been set as a
is set as the central FTP server.
central FTP NOTE
server You can run the DSP SAUINSTANCE command to query information about the
service component installed on an SAU board.

Check whether 1. Log in to the U2000/M2000 client and open the topology view.
the IP address 2. Right-click the base station controller and choose properties from
of the SAU has the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, check that the IP
been address of the SAU has been set properly.
configured on  If a single SAU board is configured, the IP address of the SAU
the is set to the external IP address of the SAU.
U2000/M2000  If two SAU boards are configured, the IP address of the SAU is
set to the external IP address of the SAU board that has been set
to the central FTP server.
NOTE
For details about how to check and configure NE attributes on the
U2000/M2000, see the U2000/M2000 online help.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

----End

3.2 Reinstalling and Commissioning the SAU


This chapter describes how to reinstall the operating system. When the operating system of
the SAU is broken down at the site, you need to reinstall the operating system software and
SAU applications. The other operations are the same as those during the initial
commissioning.

3.2.1 SAU Reinstallation Procedure


This section describes how to reinstall the SAU so that you can install and commission the
SAU quickly. You need to reinstall the operating system when reinstalling the SAU.
Figure 3-4 shows the procedure for reinstalling the SAU.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Figure 1.1 Procedure for reinstalling the SAU

Table 3-9 describes the operations of Figure 3-4.

Table 1.1 Description of SAU reinstallation


No. Procedure Description

1 3.1.2 Preparing for Check the configuration of the SAU board and the
the Installation availability of the SAU application installation package.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

No. Procedure Description

2 3.2.2.1 Preparing the Use the USB installation CD-ROM to quickly install the
USB Installation Dopra Linux operating system during the reinstallation.
CD-ROM
3 3.2.2.2 Installing the
Operating System
4 3.1.4 Logging In to Log in to the SAU through the external fixed IP address
the SAU of the SAU. The external fixed IP address is recorded in
7.1 Data Sheet of SAU Software Installation
Information.
5 3.1.6.1 Uploading Use the FileZilla software to upload the SAU
the SAU Application applications to the SAU board.
Package
6 3.1.6.2 Installing Install the SAU applications on the SAU board.
SAU Applications
(for the EBC and
EMS Service
Components)
7 3.1.6.3 Checking the Check the operating status of the SAU applications by
Installation of the checking the SAU installation directory.
SAU Applications
(for the EBC Service
Component)
3.1.6.4 Checking the
Installation of the
SAU Applications
(for the EMS Service
Component)
8 3.1.7.2 Changing the Change the external IP addresses according to actual
IP Address of the situations. In normal cases, do not change the
SAU (for the EBC or debugging IP and IP address segment.
EMS Service
Component)
9 Setting a Central Specify the SAU board where the EBC or EMS service
FTP Server component is installed as the FTP center.

After the preceding operations, you need to check that the SAU is installed and commissioned through
certain check items. For details, see 3.1.8 Checking the Installation and Commissioning of the SAU.

3.2.2 Installing the Operating System


This section describes how to install the Dopra Linux operating system. The operating system
is installed on the SAU board before delivery. You need to install the operating system again
only during the reinstallation at the site.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

3.2.2.1 Preparing the USB Installation CD-ROM


This section describes how to prepare a USB installation CD-ROM to quickly install and
restore the operating system of the SAU.

Prerequisites
 The SAU board is SAUc or ESAUa.
 The capacity of the USB disk is greater than 1 GB.You are advised to prepare the USB
installation CD-ROM with a blank USB disk. If you use a USB disk containing data, the
data may be lost.
 The PC must meet one of the following requirements:
The Windows 7 Professional operating system has been installed. The version of
Dopra_Linux_U tool package must be DOPRA Linux USB Disk Creator v1.1.1 or later.
 The USB disk is inserted into the USB port on the PC.
 The Dopra_Linux_U tool package is obtained. For details, see 3.1.2 Preparing for the
Installation.
 The IP addresses and SAU name planned by the customer are obtained.

Context
The USB installation CD-ROM is used in the following scenarios:
 Initial installation of the SAU operating system
 Restoration of the collapsed SAU operating system
When the USB installation CD-ROM is used to perform operations on the SAU, the data on
the SAU may be lost or reserved:
 If the operation mode of the USB installation CD-ROM is install, the SAU hard disk is
formatted, and the SAU data is lost. Ensure that you have backed up the SAU data before
installing the SAU operating system through the USB installation CD-ROM.
 If the operation mode of the USB installation CD-ROM is recover, the SAU operating
system is restored, and the SAU application data is reserved.
 If the operation mode of the USB installation CD-ROM is upgrade, the SAU data is
removed to the new operating system smoothly, and the SAU application data is
reserved.

Procedure
Step 1 Preparing the configuring files
1. Double-click the Dopra Linux\default_config\configuration_files folder in the Dopra
Linux tool package.
2. Set each configuration file according to Table 3-10.
You can open each configuration file by using a tool such as the UltraEdit-32 to set
various configuration items of each file.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Table 1.1 Description of configuration files


Configura Path Description Configuration Method
tion File

ifcfg-bond1 Paths for Used for You can set the following configuration
saving configuring the items:
configurati external Ethernet  IPADDR, indicating the fixed IP
on files are adapter team of the address for the Ethernet adapter
as follows SAU team
according
ifcfg-bond2 to the SAU Used for  NETMASK, indicating the subnet
board type: configuring the mask for the Ethernet adapter team
commissioning  NETWORK, indicating the network
 Path for Ethernet adapter of
the address for the Ethernet adapter
the SAU team
SAUc
ifcfg-vlan1 board: Used for  BROADCAST, indicating the
Dopra configuring the broadcast address for the Ethernet
Linux\d internal Ethernet adapter team
efault_c adapter team of the The preceding configuration items
onfig\o SAU must meet the requirements as follows:
muc\co
nfigatio
 IPADDR&NETMASK =
n_files\ NETWORK
networ  IPADDR|(~NETMASK) =
k BROADCAST
 Path for & indicates the AND logical operation,
the | indicates the OR logical operation,
ESAUa and ~ indicates the CPL logical
board: operation. For example,
Dopra 10.121.139.201 & 255.255.255.0 =
Linux\d 10.121.139.0; 10.121.139.201 |
efault_c (~255.255.255.0) = 10.121.139.255
onfig\eo NOTICE
mua\co  IPADDR=80.168.3.50 in the ifcfg-vlan1
nfigatio file must be changed to
n_files\ IPADDR=80.168.3.250.
networ  Do not change other configuration items.
k Otherwise, the network fails.
 If two SAU boards are installed, leave
the fixed internal IP address of the
second board empty when you reinstall
the operating system on this board. This
avoids conflicts between the default fixed
internal IP addresses of the two SAU
boards.

routes Used for Change the IP address of the gateway


configuring the of the network where the external
default SAU route Ethernet adapter team is located to
172.121.139.1.
NOTICE
Other configuration items cannot be
changed. Otherwise, the network fails.

dlcfg.conf Paths for Used for Set the value of mbsc_dopra_linux as

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Configura Path Description Configuration Method


tion File

saving configuring the the actual computer name.


configurati name of the server
on files are where the SAU
as follows applications are
according installed
to the SAU
board type:
 Path for
the
SAUc
board:
Dopra
Linux\d
efault_c
onfig\o
muc\co
nfigatio
n_files
 Path for
the
ESAUa
board:
Dopra
Linux\d
efault_c
onfig\eo
mua\co
nfigatio
n_files

 After the configuration items are changed, you must convert the format of the configuration items as
follows in accordance with the Dopra Linux operating system. Choose File > Conversions > DOS
to UNIX, and save the file.
 The configuration files contain the Ethernet adapters teaming relationship. You cannot change the
teaming relationship manually. Use the default values.

Step 2 Double-click DLUSBCreator-CLI.exe in Dopra Linux\tools to use the tool for creating
USB installation CD-ROM, as shown in Figure 3-5.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Figure 2.1 DL USB Disk Creator Version 1.0.1 window

Step 3 Select a USB drive for the PC from the USB Drive (Use With Care) drop-down list box.

If the drive of the USB is not displayed, check that the USB installation CD-ROM is inserted properly.
Then, click Refresh to refresh the drive of the USB installation CD-ROM.

Step 4 Click Add dist to add information about the USB installation CD-ROM to be prepared, as
shown in Figure 3-6.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Figure 4.1 Add New Distribution dialog box

Step 5 Set Dist file path, and click to select the operating system installation file.

 By default, the operating system installation file of the SAUc board is saved in Dopra
Linux\default_config\omuc\dopraLinux_target_file\dl-e.target.
 By default, the operating system installation file of the ESAUa board is saved in Dopra
Linux\default_config\eomua\dopraLinux_target_file\dl-e.target.

Step 6 If the ESAUa board is used, Set Install Scripts Dir to Dopra
Linux\default_config\eomua\install_scripts. If the SAUc board is used, Install Scripts Dir
is not configured by default.

Step 7 Set Config Scripts Dir, and click to select configuration folders in Step 1.

Paths for saving configuration files are as follows according to the SAU board type:
 Path for the SAUc board: Dopra Linux\default_config\omuc\configation_files
 Path for the ESAUa board: Dopra Linux\default_config\eomua\configation_files

Step 8 Set Select Boot Type to install.


 install is used to initially install Dopra Linux operating system.
 upgrade is used to upgrade Dopra Linux operating system from an earlier version to a
later version.
 recover is used to restore the existing Dopra Linux operating system.
Step 9 Set Select dist Type and specify the SAU board type.
 If the SAUc board is used, select omuc.
 If the ESAUa board is used, select eomua.
Step 10 After checking the settings, click OK.
Step 11 Optional: If you need to prepare multiple USB installation CD-ROMs, select another USB
drive and set related information about USB installation CD-ROMs. For details, refer to the
settings from Step 3 to Step 10.
Step 12 Click Create after the USB Drive (Use With Care) is set properly.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

The system displays a message, prompting you to check whether to format the USB disk. If
the USB disk is to be formatted, the USB installation CD-ROM starts to be created. After the
creation is complete, a message is displayed indicating whether the creation is successful.

 It takes about 10 minutes to create the USB installation CD-ROM.


 After the USB-based installation CD-ROM is created, for SAUc boards, you have to copy
the JasperLinuxDrv.Install.tar file from
Dopra_Linux\default_config\omuc\dopraLinux_target_file to the root directory on the
USB flash drive. Otherwise, the SAU software will fail to be installed properly on the
installed operating system.

----End

3.2.2.2 Installing the Operating System


This section describes how to install the operating system on the SAU using the USB
installation CD-ROM. If the operating system is already installed on the SAU, install and
replace the operating system without formatting the original operating system.

Prerequisites
 Obtain a VGA cable for connecting the SAU board and the monitor.
 Obtain a keyboard that provides USB ports.
 Obtain a power cable for connecting the monitor.
 The USB installation CD-ROM is prepared. For details, see 3.2.2.1 Preparing the USB
Installation CD-ROM.
 The hard disk on the SAU is set to RAID 1. For details, see 4.1.1 How Can I Set Hard
Disks to the RAID 1 Mode.
 The SAU is set to be preferentially restarted through the USB port. For details, see 4.1.4
How Can I Boot the SAU from the USB .
 There are two USB ports available on the SAU board panel.

The USB disk with LED is inserted into the USB port of the SAU board. If the LED is on, then the USB
port is available.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the USB installation CD-ROM into any of the USB ports on the SAU board panel.
Step 2 Press the RESET or PWRBTN button on the panel of the SAU board to reset the SAU board.
The installation of the operating system starts.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 For the ESAUa board, press the RESET button.


 For the SAUc board, press the PWRBTN button.

Step 3 Check whether the SAU operating system is successfully installed through either of the
following methods.
 Method 1: Wait for 5 to 10 minutes to view the status of the LEDs on the SAU board
panel.

The state of the LEDs on the SAU board panel can be: RUN LED flashes, ALM LED flashes, ACT LED
flashes, and OFFLINE LED is off.

Table 1.1 Status of the LEDs on the SAUc/ESAUa board panel when the SAU operating system is
installed
Board Successful Installation Failed Installation

SAUc/ESAUa  RUN LED blinks.  RUN LED is off.


 ALM LED is off.  ALM LED blinks.
 ACT LED is off.  ACT LED is off.
 OFFLINE LED blinks.  OFFLINE LED blinks.

 Method 2: Connect the display to the VGA port on the SAU board panel. The SAU
operating system is successfully installed if the following message is displayed:
Please login from TTY2(Press ALT-F2).

----End

Follow-up Procedure
 If the SAU operating system fails to be installed, perform the following operations:
1. Check that the SAU is preferentially started up through the USB port
by referring to 4.1.4 How Can I Boot the SAU from the USB .
2. Check whether the configuration files and operating system installation scripts are
correct.
− If the configuration files and operating system installation scripts are incorrect,
perform the operations in 3.2.2.1 Preparing the USB Installation CD-ROM.
− If the configuration files and operating system installation scripts are correct, contact
Huawei technical support engineers.
 If the SAU operating system is installed successfully, log in to the SAU by referring to
3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.

3.3 Replace an SAU Board


This section describes how to replace a faulty SAU board. The SAU board is hot-swappable.
It takes about 16 minutes to replace the SAU board.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Prerequisites
 The tools used for replacing the SAU board are ready. The required tools are as follows:
ESD wrist strap, Phillips screwdriver, and ESD box/bag.
 You have prepared a new SAU board.
 You have powered off the SAU board to be replaced.

Context
The following items of the new SAU board must be consistent with those of the SAU board to
be replaced:
 Password of the administrator of the operating system
 Internal and external fixed IP addresses
 SAU name

 When two SAU boards are deployed, specify the SAU board where the Nastar service
component is installed as the FTP center if the SAU board where the EBC or EMS service
component is installed needs to be replaced due to certain faults. After a new SAU board is
deployed for installing the EBC or EMS service component, specify this SAU board as the
FTP center.
 Replacing the SAU board that works independently will disrupt the communication
between the host boards and the SAU, which results in system data loss.
 When installing and removing ESAUa board, use a 5 x 200 screwdriver with a long
handle. The screwdriver uses type No.1 bit, it is 200 mm (7.87 in.) long in total, and the
diameter of the bit is 5 mm (0.17 in.).

Procedure
Step 1 Wear the ESD wrist strap and connect the ground core of the wrist strap to the ESD jack on
the cabinet.
If no ESD wrist strap is available or no proper location for grounding the wrist strap, wear the
ESD gloves.
Step 2 Remove the SAU board to be replaced.
1. Loosen the captive screw on the SAU board counterclockwise with a screwdriver, as
shown in A of Figure 3-7.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Figure 2.1 Uninstalling the SAU board

The preceding figure takes an ESAUa board as an example. The procedure for an SAUc board is similar.
2. Optional: If the board is an SAUc board, gently press the PWRBTN button.
3. Press and hold the two locking buttons, flip outward the ejector levers on the SAU board
panel to unlock them, and rotate them outward. The SAU board is separated from the
backplane, as shown in part B of Figure 3-7.

Turning outwards the ejector levers on the SAU board gives a power-off sign to the SAU board. The
SAU board automatically shuts down the operating system and stops the read/write operations on the
hard disk. Then, the OFFLINE/OFL LED on the SAU board is on steady. In indicates that the SAU
board is powered off.
4. Remove the Ethernet cable, mouse cable, keyboard cable, and monitor cable (if
configured) from the SAU board after the OFFLINE/OFL LED flashes fast and then is
steady blue.
5. Remove the SAU board to be replaced along the guide rail of the subrack, as shown in C
of Figure 3-7.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Step 3 Install the new SAU board.


1. Press and hold the two locking buttons of the new board, flip outward the ejector levers
to separate them from the self-locking latch, and rotate them until they cannot be rotated,
as shown in part A of Figure 3-8.
2. Slide the new SAU board along the guide rails into the subrack, as shown in B of Figure
3-8.

Figure 3.1 Installing the SAU board

 The preceding figure takes an ESAUa board as an example. The procedure for an SAUc or is similar.
 The SAU is preferentially inserted into slots that meet the requirements. For details, see 2.3 Slot
Planning.
3. Turn the ejector levers on the SAU board inwards until they are in position, as shown in
C of Figure 3-8.
4. Tighten the captive screw clockwise with a screwdriver, as shown in D of Figure 3-8.
The new SAU board loads automatically and the RUN LED blinks (0.125s on and 0.125s
off).
5. Install the cables by referring to the labels.
Step 4 Install the SAU Software.
For details, see 3.1.6 Installing the SAU Software.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Step 5 Configure the IP addresses, name and password of the administrator of the operating system
of the new SAU board to ensure that they are the same as those of the replaced SAU board.
For details, see 3.4.2 Changing the IP Address of the SAU Ethernet Adapter Team (for the
EBC or EMS Service Component), 3.4.3 Changing the SAU Name (for the EBC or EMS
Service Component) and 3.4.11.1 Changing the Password of Operating System User root.
Step 6 Confirm that the SAU board works properly.
1. Run the DSP SAU command to query the status of the new SAU board when the RUN
indicator is blinking (1s on and 1s off).
If ... Then ...

Operating Status is Active Go to Step 6.3.


Normal

Other execution results are Go to Step 6.2.


displayed

2. Check whether the alarms related board faults are displayed on the LMT.
If ... Then ...

Alarms related to board faults are 1. Analyze the alarms according to the alarm
reported information, and then clear the alarms.
2. Go to Step 6.1.
Alarms related to board faults are Go to Step 6.3.
not displayed

3. Run the DSP SAUMODULE command to query the status of the SAU services.
If ... Then ...

Status is Startup Type The replacing is complete.

Status is Stopped Restart the abnormal process. If the fault persists,


contact the Huawei technical support engineers.
Status is Abnormal Contact Huawei technical support engineers.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
1. Record the name of the site, slot, and board where the faulty board is located and the
version of the board.
2. Check whether there is obvious physical damage to the board. For example, check
whether there are any deformed mechanical parts, burned components, distorted
connectors, and bent or broken-off pins.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

3. Record the fault cause, fault symptom, alarm name, status of indicators on the panel of
the board, and details of the procedures for locating and processing the faults on site.
4. Put the board into the ESD bag and then put the bag together with the onsite fault record
into the board box. Keep the box properly.
5. Contact the local Huawei office to handle the faulty board.

3.4 Operating and Maintaining the SAU


This chapter describes how to operate and maintain the SAU after it is installed. To perform
this task, you need to log in to the Linux operating system remotely or run MML commands.

3.4.1 Checking the Version of the Operating System


This section describes how to check that the version of the operating system (OS) on the SAU
board is correct.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following command to check the OS version:
# cat /etc/DL-Release

Information similar to the following is displayed, where VXXXRXXXCXX is the OS version. The
information next to the version is the suffix ID of an OS. For example, 2013020218321359847962 or
Jasper-OMU-V100R001C02.
VXXXRXXXCXXSPCXXX.2013020218321359847962

Or
VXXXRXXXCXX.Jasper-OMU-V100R001C02

Or
DopraLinuxVXXXRXXXCXX.1

You only need to check that the OS version is correct and do not need to focus on the suffix
ID. Different SAU boards support different OS versions:
 SAUc: Dopra Linux V200R003C02 or later
 ESAUa: RTOS V100R001C00 or later
RTOS is an upgraded Dopra Linux system.
----End

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

3.4.2 Changing the IP Address of the SAU Ethernet Adapter Team


(for the EBC or EMS Service Component)
This section describes how to change the IP address of the SAU Ethernet adapter team. The IP
address of the SAU Ethernet adapter team is set before delivery. Therefore, such an IP address
is not obtained from the network and may be inconsistent with the actual network planning.
You can change the IP address of the SAU Ethernet adapter team according to the actual
requirements.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).

Context

Improperly changing the IP address of the Ethernet adapter team leads to network failure.
Therefore, you must follow the instructions.

Procedure
 Change the external fixed IP address when the SAU applications are operating normally.
1. Change the external fixed IP address by referring to 3.1.7.2 Changing the IP Address of
the SAU (for the EBC or EMS Service Component), and then record the new IP address
in 7.1 Data Sheet of SAU Software Installation Information.
 Replace the SAU board, and reconfigure the IP addresses of the internal and external
Ethernet adapter teams.
1. Replace the SAU board by referring to 3.3 Replace an SAU Board.

Replace the SAU board, and reconfigure the IP addresses of the internal and external Ethernet adapter
teams, to avoid the conflicts between the IP addresses of the internal and external Ethernet adapter
teams.
2. Configure the external Ethernet adapter team and its IP address by referring to 3.1.7.2
Changing the IP Address of the SAU (for the EBC or EMS Service Component), and
then record the IP address in 7.1 Data Sheet of SAU Software Installation Information.
----End

3.4.3 Changing the SAU Name (for the EBC or EMS Service
Component)
This section describes how to change the name of the SAU board on the Linux operating
system.

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 The SAU applications are installed on the SAU server.

Context
The SAU name have been planned. You need to change the SAU name and IP addresses
through the omutool after you have installed the SAU applications. For details about how to
change the IP addresses, see 3.4.2 Changing the IP Address of the SAU Ethernet Adapter
Team (for the EBC or EMS Service Component).

Procedure
Step 1 Stop SAU processes.

If both EBC and EMS service components are deployed on the SAU board, their processes must be
stopped.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

If the service component Then...


is...

EBC 1. Run the following command to stop SAU service


processing processes (for the EBC service
component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop
If the command output contains All processes
have been stopped successfully!, it
indicates that all service processes are stopped.
Otherwise, run the sau4ebc_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop the board
management processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
3. Check whether all the SAU processes have been
stopped by referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of
SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component).
EMS 1. Run the following command to stop SAU service
processing processes (for the EMS service
component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop
If the command output contains All processes
have been stopped successfully!, it
indicates that all service processes are stopped.
Otherwise, run the sau4ems_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop the board
management processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
3. Check whether all the SAU processes have been
stopped by referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status
of SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component).

Step 2 Switch the current directory to the directory where the omutool is saved.
Assume that the active workspace of the SAU is in /mbsc/bam/version_a. Run the following
command, and then press Enter:
# cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam

You can query the active workspace of the SAU by one of the following methods:

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 Run the command in the SAU: cat /mbsc/bam/common/reg.ini|grep bamarea|sed -e "s/bamarea//"|


sed -e "s/=//".
 Log in to the LMT, run the MML command DSP SAUAREA to query the active workspace of the
SAU.

Step 3 Run the following command to change the name of the SAU, and then press Enter.
# ./omutool hostname SAU name

For example, to change the SAU name to sau_123, run the ./omutool hostname sau_123
command.
Step 4 Start the SAU processes to make the parameters take effect.

If you have logged in to the SAU (for example, by using PuTTY), you need to log in to the SAU again
using PuTTY so that the host name in the login window changes to the new one.

If the service component Then...


is ...

EBC 1. Run the following commands to start SAU processes,


including the SAU service processing processes and
board management processes (for the EBC service
component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_start
2. Check whether all the SAU processes have been
started by referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of
SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component).
EMS 1. Run the following commands to start SAU processes,
including the SAU service processing processes and
board management processes (for the EMS service
component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start
2. Check whether all the SAU processes have been
started by referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status of
SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component).

----End

3.4.4 Setting the SAU Routing and Forwarding Function


This section describes how to enable and disable the SAU routing and forwarding function,
and how to query the function status.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Context

 The SAU routing and forwarding function is enabled by default. You can disable this function to
improve SAU security.
 The SAU routing and forwarding function cannot be disabled if the related scenarios are required
onsite.
 This section applies only to the Dopra Linux V2 operating system.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following command to switch from the current directory to the directory that stores
the ip_forward.sh script.
Assume that the active workspace of the SAU is installed in the /mbsc/bam/version_a
directory. Run the following command:
# cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam

Two methods are available for querying the SAU workspace:


 Type the following command on the SAU:
# cat /mbsc/bam/common/reg.ini|grep bamarea|sed -e "s/bamarea//"|sed -e "s/=//"
 Log in to the LMT and run the DSP SAUAREA command.

Step 2 Run the following command to set the execute permission on the ip_forward.sh script:
# chmod +x ip_forward.sh

Step 3 Perform the following operations as required.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

If you need to... Run...

Disable the SAU routing and # ./ip_forward.sh disable


forwarding function If the following information is displayed, this function
is disabled:
Disabling ip forward

Enable the SAU routing and # ./ip_forward.sh enable


forwarding function If the following information is displayed, this function
is enabled:
Enabling ip forward

Check the status of the SAU # ./ip_forward.sh status


routing and forwarding Information similar to the following is displayed:
function
Configuration status: disabled Actual
status: disabled

Parameters and values are described as follows:


 Configuration status indicates the required status
to be set for the SAU routing and forwarding
function.
 Actual status indicates the actual status of the SAU
routing and forwarding function.
 enabled indicates that the SAU routing and
forwarding function is enabled, and disabled
indicates that the SAU routing and forwarding
function is disabled.
NOTE
If the values of Configuration status and Actual status are
the same and meets your requirements, the settings of the
SAU routing and forwarding function are correct. Otherwise,
reset the SAU routing and forwarding function.

----End

3.4.5 Setting the Function of Recording Real-time Operating


System Access Information
This section describes how to set the function of recording real-time operating system access
information. This function helps you monitor the operating system of the SAU. After this
function is enabled, the SAU automatically records the user information when a user logs in
to or logs out of the operating system of the SAU, and transmits the information to the peer
end in real time by using the Syslog service. The transmitted user information includes the
user name for logging in to the operating system of the SAU, IP address of the user, and
number of port that is accessed on the SAU.

Prerequisites
 The operating system of the peer end for the SAU is Linux or Unix.
 You have logged in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Context
This function can be enabled on multiple SAU boards, and the access information can be
reported to the peer ends simultaneously.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following command to switch from the current directory to the directory that stores
the syslog_config.sh script:
Assume that the active workspace of the SAU is installed in the /mbsc/bam/version_a
directory. Run the following command:
# cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam

Two methods are available for querying the SAU workspace:


 Type the following command on the SAU:
# cat /mbsc/bam/common/reg.ini|grep bamarea|sed -e "s/bamarea//"|sed -e "s/=//"
 Log in to the LMT and run the DSP SAUAREA command.

Step 2 Run the following command to set the execute permission on the syslog_config.sh script:
# chmod +x syslog_config.sh

Step 3 Perform the following operations as required.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

If you need to... Run...

Enable the function of # ./syslog_config.sh XXX PORT


recording real-time access  XXX is the IP address of the peer end.
information about the
operating system of the SAU
 PORT is the port number used by the peer end after
this function is enabled. Port 514 is recommended.
The following is a command example:
# ./syslog_config.sh 10.142.38.157 514
If the following information is displayed, this function
is enabled:
Enable ok.

The real-time access information about the operating


system of the SAU is stored in the /var/log/auth.log
file.
Disable the function of # ./syslog_config.sh disable
recording real-time access If the following information is displayed, this function
information about the is disabled:
operating system of the SAU
Disable ok.

Check the status of the # ./syslog_config.sh l


function of recording real-  If the following information is displayed, the
time access information about function of recording real-time access information
the operating system of the about the operating system of the SAU is enabled:
SAU
The function is enabled.
 If the following information is displayed, the
function of recording real-time access information
about the operating system of the SAU is disabled:
The function is disabled.

----End

3.4.6 Setting SSL Configuration Parameters of the SAU


The OMU centrally manages the digital certificates of the SAU working with BSC6900
V900R016C00, BSC6910 V100R016C00, or a later version. In addition, the Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL) parameter configuration is automatically synchronized to the SAU on a daily
basis. Therefore, you only have to set SSL configuration parameters on the OMU. Then, the
parameter settings are automatically synchronized to the SAU boards to ensure security of
data transfer between the SAU and EBC, and Trace Server.

Prerequisites
The SAU works with BSC6900 V900R016C00, BSC6910 V100R016C00, or a later version.

Context
When the SAU works with a version earlier than BSC6900 V900R016C00 or BSC6910
V100R016C00, set SSL configuration parameters of the SAU by referring to 4.2.12 How Do I
Set SSL Configuration Parameters on the SAU by Running Commands on the Server?.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Install and activate digital certificates, and set SSL configuration parameters of the OMU. For
detailed operations, see Setting the Connection Mode Between the U2000/M2000 and the
BSC6900 to SSL or Setting the Connection Mode Between the U2000/M2000 and the
BSC6910 to SSL in the commissioning guide of the NE working with the SAU.
The security policies on the OMU are automatically synchronized to the SAU on a scheduled
basis. After the synchronization, the SSL configuration parameter settings on the OMU are
automatically synchronized to the SAU.
Step 2 Set SSL parameters of the upper-layer applications for the SAU.
For detailed operations, see the sections of setting SSL connections in the product
documentation of the U2000/M2000 (EBC and Trace Server).
----End

3.4.7 Granting the Function of Running SAU Processes as a Non-


root User
This section describes how to configure the function of running SAU processes as a non-root
user. The purpose is to improve SAU security.

Prerequisites
 The version of NEs that work with the SAU is BSC6910 V100R016, BSC6900
V900R016, or later.
 This function does not support Dopra Linux V100R001C03.
 You are not allowed to add a user-defined user omuser that does not belong to the non-
root user group to the Linux operating system.
 You have logged in to the SAU. For details, see Logging In to the SAU.

Context
 After this function is enabled, the operating system user omuser will be automatically
added. User omuser, which belongs to the root user group, can be used to run SAU
processes but not to log in to the SAU. This user has no password and does not support
password setting.
 After the function is enabled, the omud, monitor, sau_manager, and sntp processes can
only be executed by user root. Other processes can be executed by user omuser.
 If non-root users run SAU processes, they do not have file operation rights that are only
granted to user root, thereby improving system security.
 In upgrade scenarios, this function remains the status before the upgrade. By default, this
function is disabled for new networks.

Procedure
Step 1 Stop SAU processes.

If both EBC and EMS service components are deployed on the SAU board, their processes must be
stopped.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

If the service component Then...


is...

EBC 1. Run the following commands to stop SAU service


processing processes (EBC service component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop
If the command output contains All processes
have been stopped successfully!, it
indicates that all service processes are stopped.
Otherwise, run the sau4ebc_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop board
management processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
3. Check whether all SAU processes have been stopped
by referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of SAU
Processes (for the EBC Service Component).
EMS 1. Run the following commands to stop SAU service
processing processes (EMS service component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop
If the command output contains All processes
have been stopped successfully!, it
indicates that all service processes are stopped.
Otherwise, run the sau4ems_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop board
management processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
3. Check whether all SAU processes have been stopped
by referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status of SAU
Processes (for the EMS Service Component).

Step 2 Start the omutool.


1. Switch the current directory to the directory where the omutool is saved.
Assume that the active workspace of the SAU is in /mbsc/bam/version_a. Run the
following command, and then press Enter:
# cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam

You can query the active workspace of the SAU by using one of the following methods:

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 Run the following command on the SAU: cat /mbsc/bam/common/reg.ini|grep bamarea|sed -e


"s/bamarea//"|sed -e "s/=//".
 Log in to the LMT, and run the MML command DSP SAUAREA to query the active workspace of
the SAU.
2. Run the following command to start the omutool and display parameter information
about the omutool:
# ./omutool
Step 3 Enable, disable, or query the function of running SAU processes as a non-root user.

If you need to... Then...

Enable the function of running Run the following command and press Enter:
SAU processes as a non-root # ./omutool privilege_restrict on
user
When the following information is displayed, the
command is successfully executed:
Successfully set the privilege restrict flag on!

Disable the function of running Run the following command and press Enter:
SAU processes as a non-root # ./omutool privilege_restrict off
user
When the following information is displayed, the
command is successfully executed:
Successfully set the privilege restrict flag off!

Query the status of the Run the following command and press Enter:
function of running SAU # ./omutool privilege_restrict
processes as a non-root user
Information similar to the following is displayed,
showing the status query result:
Current privilege restrict flag is OFF.

Step 4 Start SAU processes.

If the service component Then...


is...

EBC Run the following commands:


# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_start

EMS Run the following commands:


# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

----End

3.4.8 Checking and Resetting the SAU


This section describes how to manage the operating status of the SAU by running MML
commands.

3.4.8.1 Checking the Operating Status of the SAU


This section describes how to check the running information about the SAU and the board
status.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT.

Procedure
 Check the information about the SAU.
Run the DSP SAU command to query the operating status of the SAU, IP address
configuration information, and version information.
 Check the operating status of the SAU.
Run the DSP SAUSRV command to query the CPU usage, memory usage, total capacity of
every logical disk, available space, and percentage of the available space of the SAU board.
 Check the work area information of the SAU.
Run the DSP SAUAREA command to query the versions of the SAU software installed on
the active and standby work areas of the SAU.
 Check status of processes on the SAU.
Run the DSP SAUMODULE command to query the status and startup type of each SAU
process.
----End

3.4.8.2 Resetting the SAU


This section describes how to reset the SAU board and SAU applications.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the LMT.

Context
 When you add data to an SAU board, you need to reset the SAU board.
 If you reset an SAU board by performing a hard reset, the operating system on the SAU
board will be restarted. Faults caused by the SAU operating system and applications will
be rectified after the reset is successful.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 If you reset an SAU board by performing a soft reset, the management processes on the
SAU board will be interrupted. Faults caused by the SAU applications will be rectified
after the reset is successful.

Procedure
 Run the RST SAU command to reset the SAU board specified by the subrack number
and slot number and SAU applications.
− If Reset Type is set to SOFT (soft reset), only the SAU applications are restarted.
This type is recommended.
− If Reset Type is set to HARD (hard reset), only the SAU operating system is
restarted.
----End

3.4.9 Managing the SAU Processes (for the EBC Service


Component)
This section describes how to manage the SAU processes for the EBC service component.

3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for the EBC Service
Component)
This section describes how to check the status of SAU processes, including the SAU service
processing processes and board management processes.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following commands to check the SAU service processing processes:
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh

# sau4ebc_ps
The last line of the command output is as follows:
[All Services: xx ] [Running: yy] [Not Running: zz ]

 xx in [All Services: xx ] indicates the total number of services.


 yy in [Running: yy] indicates the number of running services.
 zz in [Not Running: zz ] indicates the number of services that are not running.
If the value of zz is 0, all services are running properly. Otherwise, services that are not
running exist.
Step 2 Enter the following command to check the operating status of the board management
processes:

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

# /etc/rc.d/saud status
The board management processes runs in either of the following states:
 running state, indicating that the board management processes are running
 unused state, indicating that the board management processes are not running
----End

3.4.9.2 Starting SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component)


This section describes how to start SAU processes. You need to start the SAU processes on
the SAU before the SAU provides services.

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).
 The SAU applications are already installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following commands to start the SAU processes, including the SAU service
processing processes and board management processes:
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh

# sau4ebc_start
Step 2 Check whether all the SAU processes are started by referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status
of SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component).
----End

3.4.9.3 Stopping SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component)


This section describes how to stop SAU processes, including the SAU service processing
processes and board management processes. You need to stop SAU processes before
uninstalling the SAU applications, upgrading the SAU applications, or restoring the data.

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).
 The SAU applications are already installed.

Context

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Stop SAU processes with caution because when the SAU processes are stopped, services
provided for the EBC are interrupted.
When both EBC and EMS service components are deployed on the SAU board, the board
management processes is shared by the two service components. So if the board management
processes is stopped, the two service components can not wok properly.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following command to stop the SAU service processing processes:
# cd /opt/ebcsau

# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop

If the command output contains All processes have been stopped


successfully!, it indicates that all service processes are stopped. Otherwise, run the
sau4ebc_kill command to forcibly stop the service processes.
Step 2 Run the following command to stop the board management processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop

Step 3 Check whether all the SAU processes are stopped by referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status
of SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component).
----End

3.4.10 Managing the SAU Processes (for the EMS Service


Component)
This section describes how to manage the SAU processes for the EMS service component.

3.4.10.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for the EMS Service
Component)
This section describes how to check the status of SAU processes, including the SAU service
processing processes and board management processes.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following commands to check the SAU service processing processes:
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

# sau4ems_ps
The last line of the command output is as follows:
[All Services: xx ] [Running: yy] [Not Running: zz ]

 xx in [All Services: xx ] indicates the total number of services.


 yy in [Running: yy] indicates the number of running services.
 zz in [Not Running: zz ] indicates the number of services that are not running.
If the value of zz is 0, all services are running properly. Otherwise, services that are not
running exist.
Step 2 Enter the following command to check the operating status of the board management
processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud status

The board management processes runs in either of the following states:


 running state, indicating that the board management processes are running
 unused state, indicating that the board management processes are not running

----End

3.4.10.2 Starting SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component)


This section describes how to start SAU processes. You need to start the SAU processes on
the SAU before the SAU provides services.

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).
 The SAU applications are already installed.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following commands to start the SAU processes, including the SAU service
processing processes and board management processes:
# cd /opt/emssau

# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start

Step 2 Check whether all the SAU processes are started by referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status
of SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component).
----End

3.4.10.3 Stopping SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component)


This section describes how to stop SAU processes, including the SAU service processing
processes and board management processes. You need to stop SAU processes before
uninstalling the SAU applications, upgrading the SAU applications, or restoring the data.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).
 The SAU applications are already installed.

Context

Stop SAU processes with caution because when the SAU processes are stopped, services
provided for the EMS are interrupted.
When both EBC and EMS service components are deployed on the SAU board, the board
management processes is shared by the two service components. So if the board management
processes is stopped, the two service components can not wok properly.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following command to stop the SAU service processing processes:
# cd /opt/emssau

# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop

If the command output contains All processes have been stopped


successfully!, it indicates that all service processes are stopped. Otherwise, run the
sau4ems_kill command to forcibly stop the service processes.
Step 2 Run the following command to stop the board management processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop

Step 3 Check whether all the SAU processes are stopped by referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status
of SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component).
----End

3.4.11 Managing SAU Users


This chapter describes how to manage SAU users.

Context
For details about SAU users, see 7.3 User Names and Initial User Passwords.

3.4.11.1 Changing the Password of Operating System User root


User root is the user of the operating system. You must restrict the use of its password to only
a few engineers to prevent any risks caused by misoperations. To ensure system security, you
must change the password of user root as required.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Prerequisites
 The SAU board functions normally.
 You have logged in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.
 You have prepared the new password of user root.

Context
 It is recommended that you change the password at your first login and change the
password every three months.
 The password contains digits 0 to 9, lowercase letters a to z, uppercase letters A to Z, and
special characters. To improve password security, you are advised to use the following
password policies:
− At least one upper-case letter
− At least one lower-case letter
− At least one digit
− At least one special character `~!@#$%^&*()-_=+\|[{}];:'",<.>/? and space
− The user password must have a minimum length of 8 characters and maximum length
of 32 characters.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following command to change the password of user root:
# passwd root
Step 2 Enter the new password according to the system prompt, and then press Enter.
Step 3 Enter the new password again according to the system prompt, and then press Enter.
If the system does not display any information, the password of user root has been changed.
Otherwise, contact Huawei technical support.
Step 4 Record the new password to 7.1 Data Sheet of SAU Software Installation Information.
----End

3.4.11.2 Changing the Password of Operating System User


This section describes how to change the password of operating system user lgnusr.

Prerequisites
 The SAU board functions normally.
 You have prepared the new password.

Context
 It is recommended that you change the password at your first login and change the
password every three months.
 The password contains digits 0 to 9, lowercase letters a to z, uppercase letters A to Z, and
special characters. To improve password security, you are advised to use the following
password policies:

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

− At least one upper-case letter


− At least one lower-case letter
− At least one digit
− At least one special character `~!@#$%^&*()-_=+\|[{}];:'",<.>/? and space
− The user password must have a minimum length of 8 characters and maximum length
of 32 characters.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.
Step 2 Run the following command as user root to change the password of user lgnusr:
# passwd lgnusr

Step 3 According to the system prompt, enter the new password, and then enter the new password
again.
If the system does not display any information, the password has been changed. Otherwise,
contact Huawei technical support.
----End

3.4.11.3 Changing the Password of mysql Database User


This section describes how to change the password of mysql database user when you log in to
SAU as operating system user root.

Prerequisites
 You have installed the SAU applications.
 You have logged in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.
 You have prepared the new password of mysql database user.

Context
The password contains digits 0 to 9, lowercase letters a to z, uppercase letters A to Z, and
special characters. To improve password security, you are advised to use the following
password policies:
 The password can contain 8 to 32 characters.
 At least one digit.
 At least one lowercase letter.
 At least one uppercase letter.
 At least one special character `~!@#$%^&*()-_=+\|[{}];:'",<.>/? and space

Procedure
Step 1 Stop SAU processes.

If both EBC and EMS service components are deployed on the SAU board, their processes must be
stopped.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

If the service Then...


component is...

EBC 1. Run the following command to stop SAU service processing


processes (for the EBC service component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop
If the command output contains All processes have
been stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service
processes are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ebc_kill command
to forcibly stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop the board management
processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
3. Check whether all the SAU processes have been stopped by
referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for the
EBC Service Component).
EMS 1. Run the following commands to stop SAU service processing
processes (for the EMS service component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop
If the command output contains All processes have
been stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service
processes are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ems_kill command
to forcibly stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop the board management
processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
3. Check whether all the SAU processes have been stopped by
referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for
the EMS Service Component).

Step 2 Start the omutool.


1. Switch the current directory to the directory where the omutool is saved.
Assume that the active workspace of the SAU is in /mbsc/bam/version_a. Run the
following command, and then press Enter:
# cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam

You can query the active workspace of the SAU by one of the following methods:

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 Run the command in the SAU: cat /mbsc/bam/common/reg.ini|grep bamarea|sed -e "s/bamarea//"|


sed -e "s/=//".
 Log in to the LMT, run the MML command DSP SAUAREA to query the active workspace of the
SAU.
2. Run the following command to start the omutool and display parameter information
about the omutool:
# ./omutool
Step 3 Run the following command to change the password of mysql database user.
# ./omutool dbuserpwd
Step 4 According to the system prompt, enter the new password, and then enter the new password
again.
If the system does not display any information, the passwords of mysql database users have
been changed. Otherwise, contact Huawei technical support.
Step 5 Start SAU processes.

If the service Then...


component is...

EBC # cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_start

EMS # cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start

----End

3.4.12 Maintaining the SAU Routinely


This section describes how to check the SAU periodically, clean up disk space on the SAU,
and back up SAU files to other disk medium periodically through remote login to the SAU to
ensure proper performance of the SAU.

3.4.12.1 Periodically Checking and Cleaning Up the SAU Disk


This section describes how to periodically check and clean up the SAU hard disk to ensure
that the available space in each directory on the SAU hard disk is equal to or more than 20%.
You are advised to check and clean up the SAU hard disk once a week.

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).
 You have logged in to the LMT.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

Context
The files that can be deleted on the SAU are as follows:
 EBC service component:
− Files under /opt/ebcsau/etc/cbb_running_dir/subject/output/log generated one
week ago or earlier
− All the files under /opt/ebcsau/var/logs/backup
 EMS service component:
− Files under /opt/emssau/etc/cbb_running_dir/subject/output/log generated one
week ago or earlier
− All the files under /opt/emssau/var/logs/backup

Procedure
Step 1 Check the available space on the SAU disk.

If ... Then ...

The available space is less than 20% You must clean up the disk.

The available space is more than 20% No operation is required.

You can check the available space on the SAU disk by one of the following methods:
 Run the command in the SAU:
# df -k
In normal cases, the hard disk usage is lower than 80%, and the value of Use% is smaller than 80%.
 Log in to the LMT, run the MML command DSP SAUSRV to check the available space on the SAU
disk.

Step 2 Run the rm command to delete the files that are not required.
Before cleaning up the disk, you need to ensure that the files to be deleted are not required for
future operations. Deleting useful files by mistake may lead to improper system running.
----End

3.4.12.2 Transferring Backup Files


This section describes how to transfer files between the PC and the SAU, which is an
important method of saving and obtaining files in the OM process.

Prerequisites
 The firewall on the PC is disabled.
 The user password for FTP is obtained (for details, see 7.1 Data Sheet of SAU Software
Installation Information).
 The SAU applications are running normally.

Context
In normal cases, the flies that are required to be backed up on the SAU are as follows:

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

 All the files under /opt/ransau/data/common/datasource


 All the files under /opt/ransau/data/common/datafile

This task takes how to download the /opt/ransau/data/common/datasource folder from the SAU to
local disk D as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Use FileZilla to download the /opt/ransau/data/common/datasource folder from the SAU to
local disk D.
For details about how to use FileZilla, see 4.2.1 How Do I Use FileZilla to Transfer Files?.
The configuration information required for uploading the files is as follows:
 User and password: user root or lgnusr and its password
After operating system (OS) hardening is performed, you cannot use FileZilla to connect
to the SAU board using SFTP as user root. To connect to the SAU board using SFTP,
you must use a user name other than root, for example, lgnusr.
 Folder to be downloaded: all the files under /opt/ransau/data/common/datasource
 Directory to save the files on the PC: D:\
----End

3.4.13 Adjust SAU Slots


This section describes how to move the SAU to other slots according to the on-site planning.

Prerequisites
The target slots for the SAU are idle and can hold the SAU. Such slots refer to Slot Planning.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the SAU (for details, see Logging In To the SAU).
Step 2 Run the LST SAUCENTER command to check whether the SAU board servers as the
central FTP server.
If yes, go to Step 12 after the board adjustment. If no, you do not need to perform other
operations after the board adjustment.
Step 3 Run the /etc/rc.d/saud stop command to stop the board management processes.
Step 4 Run the poweroff command to shut down the SAU.
Step 5 When the OFFLINE LED on the SAU board panel is on, pull the SAU and insert it into the
target slots.
Step 6 Wait about 5 minutes, and then log in to the LMT to run the LST BRD command to query the
subrack number and slot numbers of the SAU before the switchover.
Step 7 Run the RMV BRD command to remove the original SAU.
Step 8 Run the ADD BRD command to add a new SAU. In this step, set slot numbers of the SAU to
the target SAU slot numbers.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide SAU Operation GuideSAU Operation Guide

For example, if the target slots of the SAU are 20 and 21, run the following command:
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=SAU, BRDTYPE=SAUc, SN=21;

Step 9 Log in to the LMT and check whether the SAU is properly displayed on the device panel and
whether it is in normal state, and then run the DSP SAU command to check whether the SAU
operate properly.
Step 10 In the LMT main window, click Alarm and select Browse Alarm to check the active alarms
on NEs.
Step 11 Optional: If there is an alarm related to the original SAU in the list of active alarms, select
the alarm, right-click it, and choose Clear Alarm from the shortcut menu to manually clear
the alarm.
Step 12 If you have detected that the SAU board servers as the central FTP server before the board
adjustment in Step 2, run the SET SAUCENTER command to specify the SAU board as the
central FTP server.
----End

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

4 FAQs

About This Chapter


This chapter describes solutions to the FAQs of the SAU and also provides methods for
common operations.
4.1 Hardware Problems Related to the SAU
4.2 Software Problems Related to the SAU

4.1 Hardware Problems Related to the SAU


4.1.1 How Can I Set Hard Disks to the RAID 1 Mode
This section describes how to set hard disks to the RAID 1 mode. The ESAUa board are
configured with two hard disks, and the hard disks are set to the RAID 1 mode before
delivery. If the hard disks need to replaced at the site, set the replaced two disks to the RAID 1
mode to ensure data synchronization.

Prerequisites
 The ESAUa board is installed with two hard disks.
 The source disk and target disk are defined as follows: The source disk is the disk whose
data is to be backed up. The target disk is the disk that stores the backup data.

Context
Figure 4-1 shows positions of the hard disks on the ESAUa board.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Figure 1.1 Locations of the hard disks on the ESAUa board

The SAUc board is configured with one hard disk.

Procedure
 Run the following steps to set hard disks to the RAID 1 Mode on the ESAUa board.
1. Insert the ESAUa board into the corresponding slot and power it on. The board starts
automatically.
2. When the system displays Press Ctrl-C to start LSI Logic
Configuration Utility..., press Ctrl+C. The LSI BIOS interface is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 1.1 LSI BIOS interface

3. Select Eval Board, and then press Enter. The adapter property interface is displayed, as
shown in Figure 4-3.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Figure 1.2 Adapter property interface

4. Select RAID Properties, and then press Enter. The interface for selecting an array type
is displayed.
− If the interface shown in Figure 4-4 is displayed, it indicates that the two hard disks
on the ESAUa board are set to the RAID 1 mode.

Figure 1.3 Selecting an array type (The hard disks are set to the RAID 1 mode.)

− If the interface shown in Figure 4-5 is displayed, it indicates that the two hard disks
on the ESAUa board are not set to the RAID 1 mode. Then, process with Step 5.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Figure 1.4 Selecting an array type (The hard disks are not set to the RAID 1 mode.)

5. Select Create RAID 1 Volume, and then press Enter. The interface for selecting the
source disk and target disk is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-6.

Figure 1.5 Selecting the source disk and target disk (1)

6. Set a disk at the source disk, and then press SPACEBAR. The following information is
displayed:
M - Keep existing data, migrate to an IM array.
Synchronization of disk will occur.
D - Overwrite existing data, create a new IM array
ALL DATA on ALL disks in the array will be DELETED!!
NO Synchronization performed.

Meanings of the information:


− If you press M, the existing data on the source disk is retained and is copied to the
target disk.
− If you press D, the system removes the existing data from the source disk and creates
a RAID 1 array.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

 Avoid pressing D because all data on source disk will be lost.


 On the interface shown in Figure 4-6, Slot Num 0 corresponds to Disk 0 shown in Figure
4-1 and Slot Num 1 corresponds to Disk 1 shown in Figure 4-1.

7. Press M to define the source disk. The interface shown in Figure 4-7 is displayed. At this
time, RAID Disk of the source disk is Yes and Drive Status of the source disk is
Primary.

Figure 1.6 Selecting the source disk and target disk (2)

8. Select another hard disk, and then press SPACEBAR. The warning interface shown in
Figure 4-8 is displayed.

Figure 1.7 Warning interface

9. Press C. The interface for selecting the source disk and target disk is displayed, as shown
in Figure 4-9.

Figure 1.8 Selecting the source disk and target disk (3)

10. Press C. The interface for saving the configuration is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-10.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Figure 1.9 Saving the configuration

11. Select Save changes then exit this menu, and then press Enter. The hard disks are set
to the RAID 1mode and data synchronization automatically starts. The value of Status
indicates the synchronization progress, as shown in Figure 4-11.

Figure 1.10 Array view (1)

It takes no less than 15 minutes to finish the data synchronization of the RAID 1. If the
ESAUa board is restarted during the synchronization, the synchronization restarts.

12. When the data synchronization of the RAID 1 is complete, press Esc, and then select
Exit the Configuration Utility and Reboot, as shown in Figure 4-12. Then, press
Enter. The ESAUa board is restarted.

Figure 1.11 Saving the configuration and exiting the configuration interface

----End

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

4.1.2 How Can I Query the Hardware Mapping Relations of


Network Adapters
This sections describes how to query the hardware mapping relations of network adapters.

Question
How to query the hardware mapping relations of the network adapter on the SAU board?

Answer
The installation of the SAU applications is the perquisite for querying the network
configuration of the Ethernet adapters.
Step 1 Log in to the SAU.
Step 2 Query the configuration information about the Ethernet adapters before delivery.
 If you want to query the configuration information about the Ethernet adapters on the
SAUc board, enter the /root/eth_alias_names.sh command, and then press Enter.
The following information is displayed:
eth0 02,0,0 F_ETH0
eth1 01,0,0 F_ETH1
eth2 07,0,0 F_DBG
eth3 05,0,0 B_UPDATE0
eth4 06,0,0 B_UPDATE1
eth5 03,0,0 B_ETH0
eth6 03,0,1 B_ETH1

 If you want to query the configuration information about the Ethernet adapters on the
ESAUa board, enter the /root/eth_alias_names.sh command, and then press Enter.
The following information is displayed:
eth0 05,0,0 F_ETH0
eth1 05,0,1 F_ETH1
eth2 06,0,0 F_DBG
eth3 06,0,1 B_UPDATE
eth4 01,0,0 B_ETH0
eth5 01,0,1 B_ETH1

The three columns of the configuration of SAU Ethernet adapters are detailed as follows:
 The first column lists the logical names of the Ethernet adapters for software identification.
 The second column lists the Peripheral Component Identity (PCI) of Ethernet adapters for hardware
identification.
 The third column lists the names of Ethernet adapters for users to identify the Ehternet adapters.
The mapping between the second and third columns cannot be changed. The mapping between the first
and second columns, and the mapping between the first and third columns depend on the configuration
scenarios.

----End

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

4.1.3 How Can I Query the Network Configuration of Ethernet


Adapters
This section describes how to query the network configuration of Ethernet adapters.

Question
How Can I query the network configuration of the Ethernet adapters on the SAU board?

Answer
The installation of the SAU applications is the perquisite for querying the network
configuration of the Ethernet adapters.
Step 1 Log in to the SAU.
Step 2 Run the following command to query the external fixed IP address, broadcast IP address, and
subnet mask, and then press Enter.
# ifconfig bond1
The following information is displayed:

bond1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:18:82:5B:0C:26


inet addr:10.161.21.203 Bcast:10.161.21.255 Mask:255.255.254.0
inet6 addr: fe80::218:82ff:fe5b:c26/64 Scope:Link
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MASTER MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:439779 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:130258 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0
RX bytes:57319799 (54.6 Mb) TX bytes:13458423 (12.8 Mb)

Run the following commands to query other IP addresses and subnet masks.
 Run the ifconfig bond1 command to query the fixed external IP address, broadcast IP address, and
subnet mask.
 Run the ifconfig vlan1 command to query the fixed internal IP address, broadcast IP address, and
subnet mask.
 Run the ifconfig bond2 command to query the debugging IP address, broadcast IP address, and
subnet mask.

----End

4.1.4 How Can I Boot the SAU from the USB


This section describes how to boot the SAU from the USB. Before installing the DOPRA
Linux operating system through the USB disk, ensure that the SAU board is booted from the
USB.

Prerequisites
 The local keyboard and monitor are configured and connected to the SAU board.
 The USB disk is inserted into the USB port of the SAU board.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Procedure
Step 1 Press the RESET or PWRBTN button on the SAU board panel to reset the SAU board. The
BIOS Setup dialog box is displayed.

 For the ESAUa board, press the RESET button.


 For the SAUc board, press the PWRBTN button.

Step 2 Press Delete to enter the BIOS SETUP UTILITY interface.


Step 3 Click the Boot tab, as shown in Figure 4-13.

Figure 3.1 Boot tab

Step 4 Use arrow keys to select Boot Device Priority, and then press Enter.
Step 5 Use arrow keys to select 1st Boot Device, and then press Enter.
Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the first boot device of the SAU to USB, and then press
Enter.
The previous interface returns. If the value of 1st Boot Device is [USB:******], it indicates
that the configuration is complete.
Step 7 After the setting is complete, press F10 to save the settings and exit.
----End

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

4.1.5 How Do I Ensure Normal Communication Between the SAU


and OMU When the OMU's Internal Network Segment Changes
This section describes how to act on the SAU side to ensure the normal communication
between the SAU and OMU when the network segment of the OMU's internal IP address
changes.

Context
 When the NE version is BSC6900 V900R017C00SPC500/BSC6910
V100R017C00SPC500 or later and the SAU version is V100R001C00SPC330 or later, if
the internal network segment of the OMU changes, you do not need to perform any
operations on the SAU. In this scenario, if the system detects that the internal network
communication between the SAU and OMU is disconnected after the SAU software is
started, the internal network segment of the SAU is automatically synchronized to that of
the OMU.
 When the NE version is earlier than BSC6900 V900R017C00SPC500/BSC6910
V100R017C00SPC500 or SAU version is earlier than V100R001C00SPC330, change
the internal network segment of the SAU by following the instructions provided in this
section.
All IP addresses in the internal network are centrally planned, and therefore you are not
allowed to change the internal fixed IP address of the SAU. If you change the internal
fixed IP address of the SAU forcibly, the IP address of the SAU will conflict with that of
the OMU, and consequently the communication between the SAU and the OMU fails.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the SAU. For detailed operations, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.
Step 2 Stop SAU processes.

If both EBC and EMS service components are deployed on the SAU board, their processes must be
stopped.

If the service Then...


component is...

EBC 1. Run the following command to stop SAU service processing


processes (for the EBC service component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop
If the command output contains All processes have
been stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service
processes are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ebc_kill command
to forcibly stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop the board management
processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
3. Check whether all the SAU processes have been stopped by
referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for the

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

If the service Then...


component is...
EBC Service Component).
EMS 1. Run the following commands to stop SAU service processing
processes (for the EMS service component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop
If the command output contains All processes have
been stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service
processes are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ems_kill command
to forcibly stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop the board management
processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
3. Check whether all the SAU processes have been stopped by
referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for
the EMS Service Component).

Step 3 Start the omutool. For detailed operations, see 4.2.3 How Can I Start the omutool.
Step 4 Run the following command to change the network segment of the SAU's internal IP address:
# ./omutool innersubnet internal network segment
For example, when the internal IP address of OMU is changed from 10.168.3.40 to
172.16.3.40, you need to run the following command to change the network segment of the
SAU's internal IP address:
# ./omutool innersubnet 172.16

 The internal network segment of SAU must be same as that of the OMU.
 You can change only the network segment of the SAU's internal IP address and cannot change other
parts of the IP address.

Step 5 Run the following commands to start the SAU processes for the modifications to take effect.

If the service Then...


component is...

EBC # cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_start

EMS # cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

----End

4.1.6 How Can I Set the Link Mode of the External Ethernet
Adapter of the SAU
This section describes how to set the link mode of the external Ethernet adapter on the SAU
board so that it is consistent with that of the LAN switch.

Prerequisites
 You have obtained the link mode of the LAN switch. You can contact the operator for the
specific mode of the link.
 You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).

Context
If the link mode of the external Ethernet adapter on the SAU board panel is inconsistent with
that of the LAN switch, the network may be interrupted. If the link mode of the LAN switch
is specified, the link mode of the external Ethernet adapter on the SAU board panel should
also be specified.
There are two link modes of the LAN switch: force full-duplex mode and auto-negotiation
mode.
In this section, the following case is taken as an example.
 For the SAUc and ESAUa boards, Ethernet adapters F_ETH0 and F_ETH1 correspond
to the external Ethernet adapters eth0 and eth1 identified by the operating system.
 The force link mode is force full-duplex with a rate of 10 Mbit/s.
 This section uses the SAUc and ESAUa boards as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following command to query the names of the external Ethernet adapters that are
identified by the operating system and correspond to F_ETH0 and F_ETH1:
Commands for querying the names of the external Ethernet adapters are as follows according
to the SAU board type:
 Command for the SAUc and ESAUa boards:
# /root/eth_alias_names.sh

For details about the query result, see 4.1.2 How Can I Query the Hardware Mapping Relations of
Network Adapters.

Step 2 Run the following command to query the link mode of F_ETH0:
# ethtool eth0

The following information is displayed:


Settings for eth0:
Supported ports: [ TP ]

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Supported link modes: 10baseT/Half 10baseT/Full


100baseT/Half 100baseT/Full
1000baseT/Full
Supports auto-negotiation: Yes
Advertised link modes: 10baseT/Half 10baseT/Full
100baseT/Half 100baseT/Full
1000baseT/Full
Advertised auto-negotiation: Yes
Speed: 1000Mb/s
Duplex: Full
Port: Twisted Pair
PHYAD: 0
Transceiver: internal
Auto-negotiation: on
Supports Wake-on: g
Wake-on: g
Link detected: yes

Step 3 Check whether the fields Speed, Duplex, and Auto-negotiation are consistent with the link
mode parameters for the LAN switch.

Option Description

If the link mode of eth0 is Go to Step 5.


consistent with that of the
LAN switch

If the link mode of eth0 is Go to Step 4.


not consistent with that of
the LAN switch

Step 4 Set the link mode of the SAU external Ethernet adapter according to the link mode of the
LAN switch.
1. Run the following command and press Enter to switch the current directory to the
directory where the speedduplex.sh file is saved:
# cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam

 The speedduplex.sh file is saved in the /active workspace/bin/bam directory.


 You can run the DSP SAUAREA comamd to query the SAU active workspace.
 If the SAU active workspace is in the /mbsc/bam/version_a directory, perform the following
operations:
2. Run the following command to modify file properties:
# chmod 755 speedduplex.sh
3. Set the link mode of the SAU external Ethernet adapter according to the link mode of the
LAN switch.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Option Description

If the link mode of the Run the ./speedduplex.sh F_ETH0 10 full off command.
LAN switch is force full-
duplex mode

If the link mode of the Run the ./speedduplex.sh F_ETH0 10 full on command.
LAN switch is auto-
negotiation mode

 If the link mode of the LAN switch is not anto-negotiation mode, the link mode of both the
LAN switch and the SAU external Ethernet adapter must be set to full duplex mode.
 The command for setting the link mode of the SAU external Ethernet adapter is saved to
etc/rc.d/rc.local after it is executed.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 and Step 4 to set the link mode of Ethernet adapter eth1. The setting is
complete.

The link mode of Ethernet adapter eth0 must be the same as the link mode of Ethernet adapter eth1.

----End

4.2 Software Problems Related to the SAU


4.2.1 How Do I Use FileZilla to Transfer Files?
FileZilla is a dedicated file transfer tool that supports both SFTP transfer and resumable
download. You are advised to use FileZilla to transfer files.

Prerequisites
 You have obtained the IP address of the SAU board.
 Communication is proper between the PC and the SAU board.
 You have obtained the file to be uploaded to the SAU board and have saved the file to
the PC.
 You have contacted Huawei technical support to obtain FileZilla.zip at
http://support.huawei.com and decompress it to the PC.
 You have obtained the user password of the SAU board.

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click filezilla.exe to start the tool.

Step 2 In the upper left area of the FileZilla window, click .

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Step 3 In the lower left area of the Site Manager dialog box, click New Site.
Step 4 On the General tab page, set site parameters according to Table 4-1.

Table 1.1 Parameters in the Site Manager dialog box


Parameter Description

Host Enter the IP address of the SAU board.


Port 22
Port 22 is the default port for SFTP transfer.
Server type SFTP
Logon type Normal
User Enter the user name and password of the SAU board. The user has
permission to access the destination directory.
Password
NOTE
 If the user uploads or downloads files, the user must also have the permission to
upload from or download to the destination directory.
 After operating system security hardening is performed, you cannot connect to the
SAU board through SFTP as user root using the FileZilla. To connect to the SAU
board through SFTP, you must use a user account other than root, for example,
lgnusr.

Step 5 Click Connect.

 You can ignore the dialog box displayed during the connection. Click OK in the dialog box.
 After the connection is successful, the Remote Site area displays directory information on the SAU
board.

Step 6 In the Remote site area, set the destination directory on the SAU board. For example,
/mbsc/upgrade.
After you set the directory, the Remote site area displays all files stored in this directory.

 If you need to upload files as a user other than user root (for example, user lgnusr) to a target
directory to which you are not authorized to upload files (for example, the target directory is
/mbsc/upgrade), you can upload the files to the home directory of the user (for example,
/home/lgnusr), and then log in to the SAU and run the mv command as user root to move the files
to the target directory.
 If you need to download files as a user other than user root (for example, user lgnusr) from a target
directory from which you are not authorized to download files (for example, the target directory is
/mbsc/upgrade), you can log in to the SAU and run the mv command as user root to move the files
to the home directory of the user (for example, the /home/lgnusr directory), and then download the
files from the home directory as user lgnusr.

Step 7 In the Local site area, set the source directory on the PC. For example, D:\.
After you set the directory, the Local site area displays all files stored in this directory.
Step 8 Perform the following operations as required.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Purpose Operation

Upload files In the Local site area, right-click the file to be uploaded and choose
Upload from the shortcut menu.
Download In the Remote site area, right-click the file to be downloaded and choose
files Download from the shortcut menu.

If the upload or download fails, click the Failed transfers tab in the lower left area of the FileZilla
window. Then right-click the file that fails to be transferred and choose Reset and requeue selected
files from the shortcut menu to resume the file transfer.

----End

4.2.2 How Can I Log In To the SAU in SSH Mode


This section describes how to obtain and use the PuTTY software to log in to the SAU in SSH
mode to maintain the SAU.

Prerequisites
 The PC is connected to the Internet.
 The SAU board is installed with the operating system.
 You have obtained the PuTTY software. For details, see 3.1.2 Preparing for the
Installation.

Context
PuTTY can be used for remotely logging in to the Dopra Linux operating system.

Procedure
Step 1 Double-click PuTTY.exe. The PuTTY Configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-14.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Figure 1.1 PuTTY Configuration dialog box

Step 2 Enter the IP address of the SAU board in the Host Name(or IP address) box of the Specify
the destination you want to connect to area. Then, set Connection type to SSH.

If ... Then ...

The PC is connected to ETH2 on the SAU The IP address is the debugging IP


board through an Ethernet cable address of the SAU board.

The PC is connected to ETH0 or ETH1 on the The IP address is the external fixed
SAU board through a network device IP address of the SAU board.

Step 3 Click Open. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-15.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Figure 3.1 Logging in to the server through the PuTTY software

Step 4 Log in to the SAU board as the root user or lgnusr user.
----End

4.2.3 How Can I Start the omutool


This section describes how to start the omutool.

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the SAU server (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).
 The SAU applications are installed.

Context
You can perform related tasks by running the commands attached with parameters through the
omutool.

Only user root is authorized to use omutool.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the following command as user root to switch the current directory to the directory
where the omutool is saved.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Assume that the active workspace of the SAU is in /mbsc/bam/version_a. Run the following
command, and then press Enter:
# cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam

You can query the active workspace of the SAU by using one of the following methods:
 Run the following command on the SAU: cat /mbsc/bam/common/reg.ini|grep bamarea|sed -e
"s/bamarea//"|sed -e "s/=//".
 Log in to the LMT, and run the MML command DSP SAUAREA to query the active workspace of
the SAU.

Step 2 Run the following command to start the omutool and display parameter information about the
omutool:
# ./omutool
----End

4.2.4 How Can I Set the IP Address of a PC


This section describes how to set the IP address of a PC. Before logging in to the SAU
through a PC, you must ensure that the IP address of the PC and that of the debugging port of
the SAU are on the same network segment.

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the Windows operating system as a user of the Administrators
user group.
 The connection between the PC and the debugging port of the SAU is proper.

Context
This section uses the classic view of the Windows 7 operating system as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Start > Control Panel.
Step 2 In the Control Panel window, click Network and Sharing Center.
Step 3 Click the connection to the SAU, and then choose Properties.
Step 4 In the displayed Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, select the Internet Protocol
Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) check box, and click Properties.
Step 5 In the displayed Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties dialog box, set the IP
address for the PC.
 Set the IP address, which must be on the same network segment as the debugging IP
address of the SAU.
 Set the subnet mask, which must be the same as that of the debugging port of the SAU.
 Set the default gateway, which must be the same as that of the debugging port of the
SAU.
Step 6 Click OK.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

----End

4.2.5 How Do I Uninstall SAU Applications?


This section describes how to uninstall SAU applications if they have been installed
incorrectly.

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the SAU server. For detailed operations, see 3.1.4 Logging In to
the SAU.
 You have installed SAU applications.

Context
 Uninstalling SAU applications consists of uninstalling the service components installed
on the SAU and uninstalling the BAM platform.
 If the EBC and EMS service components are installed on the SAU board and only the
EBC service component is uninstalled but the BAM platform is not installed, the EMS
service component can run properly.

Procedure
Step 1 Stop SAU processes.

If both the EBC and EMS service components have been deployed on the SAU board and you only need
to uninstall one of them, you only need to stop the process of the service component you want to
uninstall.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

If the service component Then...


is...

EBC 1. Run the following command to stop SAU service


processing processes (for the EBC service component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop
If the command output contains All processes
have been stopped successfully!, it
indicates that all service processes are stopped.
Otherwise, run the sau4ebc_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop the board
management processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
NOTE
If both the EBC and EMS service components are deployed on the
SAU board and you only need to stop one of them, do not stop the
board management processes. If you stop the board management
processes, the other service component cannot work properly.
3. Check whether all the SAU processes have been
stopped by referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of
SAU Processes (for the EBC Service Component).
EMS 1. Run the following commands to stop SAU service
processing processes (for the EMS service component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop
If the command output contains All processes
have been stopped successfully!, it
indicates that all service processes are stopped.
Otherwise, run the sau4ems_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
2. Run the following command to stop the board
management processes:
# /etc/rc.d/saud stop
NOTE
If both the EBC and EMS service components are deployed on the
SAU board and you only need to stop one of them, do not stop the
board management processes. If you stop the board management
processes, the other service component cannot work properly.
3. Check whether all the SAU processes have been
stopped by referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status of
SAU Processes (for the EMS Service Component).

Step 2 Uninstall SAU applications.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

If the service component Then...


is...

EBC 1. Run the following commands and press Enter:


# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_uninstall
The following information is displayed:
Are you sure to uninstall RANSAU [Y/N]:

2. Type Y (case insensitive) to uninstall SAU applications.


When the following information is displayed, SAU
applications have been uninstalled successfully:
Success to uninstall SAU for ebc software.

EMS 1. Run the following commands and press Enter:


# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_uninstall
The following information is displayed:
Are you sure to uninstall RANSAU [Y/N]:

2. Type Y (case insensitive) to uninstall SAU applications.


When the following information is displayed, SAU
applications have been uninstalled successfully:
Success to uninstall SAU for ems software.

Step 3 Uninstall the board management software, which is the BAM program.

If both the EBC and EMS service components are deployed on the SAU board and you only need to
uninstall one of them, do not uninstall the board management software. If you uninstall the board
management software, another service component will fail to work properly.
1. Run the uninstall_bam script and press Enter:
# cd /opt
# uninstall_bam
2. Type Y (case insensitive) to uninstall BAM programs.
3. Run the following command to check whether the BAM programs have been uninstalled
successfully:
# ls /mbsc/ | grep "bam"
 If no command output is displayed, the BAM programs have been uninstalled
successfully.
 If "bam" is displayed, not all the BAM programs have been uninstalled completely.
Repeat Step 3.1 and Step 3.2 to uninstall the BAM programs from another workspace.
----End

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

4.2.6 How Can I Install the Integrity Check Tool for Installation
Packages
This section describes how to install the integrity check tool for installation packages.

Prerequisites
You have obtained the installation package of the integrity check tool
ipsi_signcli_suse10_X86_32_pkg_2_0.tar.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).
Step 2 Upload the installation package of the integrity check tool to the SAU by using Filezilla tool.
For details about how to use the Filezilla tool, see 4.2.1 How Do I Use FileZilla to Transfer
Files?.

If... Then...

You can directly log in to the SAU board as OS hardening has not performed on the
user root SAU board.
The configuration information required for
uploading the files is as follows:
 User and password: root and its password
 Folder to be uploaded:
ipsi_signcli_suse10_X86_32_pkg_2_0.t
ar
 Directory of files on the SAU board:
/mbsc/upgrade
You can only log in to the SAU board as a OS hardening generally has been performed
user other than user root, such as user on the SAU board.
lgnusr, and then run the su - root command You need to set the following information
to switch to user root when uploading files and continue to
perform Step 3 after the upload is complete.
 User and password: lgnusr and its
password
 Folder to be uploaded:
ipsi_signcli_suse10_X86_32_pkg_2_0.t
ar
 Directory of files on the SAU board:
/home/lgnusr

Step 3 If you upload files to the /home/lgnusr directory as user lgnusr, run the following commands
as user root to move the installation package of the integrity check tool
ipsi_signcli_suse10_X86_32_pkg_2_0.tar to the /mbsc/upgrade directory:
# cd /home/lgnusr/

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

# mv ipsi_signcli_suse10_X86_32_pkg_2_0.tar /mbsc/upgrade/
Step 4 Perform the following operations to decompress the installation package.
1. Run the following commands to decompress the installation package:
# cd /mbsc/upgrade
# tar xvf ipsi_signcli_suse10_X86_32_pkg_2_0.tar
2. Run the following commands to install the integrity check tool:
# cd IPSISignCliPkg
# ./install.sh
 When the system displays the following information, the integrity check tool has been
installed on the SAU.
/opt/signtool dose exsits,please check!

 When the system displays the following information, the integrity check tool is
successfully installed.
IPSI tool software installed successfully.

----End

4.2.7 How Do I Open and Close the Non-Encrypted Json Port of


the SAU?
This section describes how to open and close the non-encrypted Json port of the SAU.

Procedure
Step 1 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.
Step 2 Stop SAU processes.

If both the EBC and EMS service components have been deployed on the SAU board, you only need to
stop the process of the service component you want to set or modify.

If the service Then...


component is...

EBC Run the following command to stop SAU service processing


processes (for the EBC service component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop
If the command output contains All processes have been
stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service processes
are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ebc_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
EMS Run the following commands to stop SAU service processing
processes (for the EMS service component):
# cd /opt/emssau

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

If the service Then...


component is...

# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop
If the command output contains All processes have been
stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service processes
are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ems_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.

Step 3 Run the following commands to execute the environment variable:

If... Then...

The EBC service # cd /opt/ebcsau


component is installed # . ./svc_profile.sh

The EMS service # cd /opt/emssau


component is installed # . ./svc_profile.sh

Step 4 Run the following command to navigate to the config_non_ssl_port.sh script path.

If... Then...

The EBC service # cd /opt/ebcsau/script/admin


component is installed

The EMS service # cd /opt/emssau/script/admin


component is installed

Step 5 Run the config_non_ssl_port.sh script:


# ./config_non_ssl_port.sh
The system displays the following information:
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
+ +
+ Welcome to use ransau Platform Tools +
+ +
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

+ Configurating non-SSL port module ...


+ Please choose one option:
+ A -- Display non-SSL port status
+ B -- Enable non-SSL port
+ C -- Disable non-SSL port
+ Q -- Exit

+ Please make a choice:

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Step 6 Open and close the non-encrypted Json port for the SAU.

If you need to... Then...

Opening the non-encrypted Json 1. Type B.


port 2. Type y as prompted.
+ Do you want to continue? [y/n] y

When the system displays Succeed to enable


non-SSL port, the non-encrypted Json ports
have been opened successfully.
Closing the non-encrypted Json 1. Type C.
port 2. Type y as prompted.
+ Do you want to continue? [y/n] y

When the system displays Succeed to


disable non-SSL port, the non-encrypted
Json ports have been closed successfully.

You can type A to check the status of the non-encrypted Json ports.
 If the system displays Non-SSL
port .......................................................
Disabled, the non-encrypted Json ports have been closed.
 If the system displays Non-SSL
port
.......................................................Enabled, the
non-encrypted Json ports have been opened.

Step 7 Based on the system prompt, enter Q to exit the script.


Step 8 Run the following command to start the SAU processes to make the settings of the non-
encrypted Json port take effect.

If... Then...

The EBC service component # cd /opt/ebcsau


is installed # . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_start

The EMS service component # cd /opt/emssau


is installed # . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start

----End

4.2.8 How Do I Manually Update SAU Digital Certificates?


This section describes how to manually update SAU digital certificates when the SAU cannot
connect to the network due to digital certificate issues.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Prerequisites
 You have logged in to the SAU (for details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU).
 You have obtained the newly digital certificates.

Context
For details about the default digital certificates of SAUs, see Table 4-2.

Table 1.1 Default configurations for SAU digital certificates


Certificat Certificate Name Save Path Description
e Type

CA rootca.pem  EBC service Install one or more CA


certificate component: certificates as required
/opt/ebcsau/etc/Cer during certificate
tificate/ca/ updating.
 EMS service
component:
/opt/emssau/etc/Ce
rtificate/ca/
Device usercert.pem  EBC service Only one device
certificate NOTE component: certificate can be
The usercert_key.pem /opt/ebcsau/etc/Cer installed on an SAU.
key corresponding to the tificate/dev/ Use the device
certificate is installed  EMS service certificate together with
together.
component: the key and upgrade
/opt/emssau/etc/Ce them at the same time.
rtificate/dev/
CRL -  EBC service The certificate
certificate component: revocation list (CRL)
/opt/ebcsau/etc/Cer certificate is not
tificate/crl/ installed by default.
 EMS service Optional. Install one or
component: more CRL certificates
/opt/emssau/etc/Ce as required during
rtificate/crl/ certificate updating.

Procedure
Step 1 Use the FileZilla to upload the obtained CA certificate, device certificate, and CRL certificate
to the save path shown in Table 4-2. For details, see 4.2.1 How Do I Use FileZilla to Transfer
Files?.
Step 2 Stop SAU processes.

If both the EBC and EMS service components have been deployed on the SAU board, you only need to
stop the process of the service component you want to set or modify.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

If the service Then...


component is...

EBC Run the following command to stop SAU service processing


processes (for the EBC service component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop
If the command output contains All processes have been
stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service processes
are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ebc_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
EMS Run the following commands to stop SAU service processing
processes (for the EMS service component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop
If the command output contains All processes have been
stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service processes
are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ems_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.

Step 3 Run the following command to modify the cerConfig.xml configuration file.

If you need to... Then...

Update the digital certificate of the EBC service Run the following command:
component # cd
/opt/ebcsau/etc/Certificate
Update the digital certificate of the EMS service Run the following command:
component # cd
/opt/emssau/etc/Certificate

# vi cerConfig.xml
Type i to enter the insert mode. Configure the following parameters as required:
 Configure transmission mode-related parameters
The parameters formats of transmission mode are similar as follows:
<AREADESC areaname="option">
<PARAS>
<PARA name="enableSSL" value="true" />
<PARA name="version" value="1" />
<PARA name="enableAuthType" value="2" />
<PARA name="alarmPeriod" value="30" />
<PARA name="clientID" value="0" />
<PARA name="privatekeyDH" value="OMU"/>
<PARA name="crlpolicy" value="0"/>

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

</PARAS>
</AREADESC>

Table 1.1 Parameter description


Parameter Definition Description

enableSSL This parameter determines This parameter cannot be


whether control flows are modified.
transmitted in SSL mode.
version This parameter determines the The SSL version can be set to:
SSL version.  1: Negotiated version during
handshaking
 2: SSL 2.0
 3: SSL 3.0
 4: TLS 1.0
 5: TLS 1.1
 6: TLS 1.2
Default value: 1
enableAuthType This parameter determines the The SSL authentication type can be
SSL authentication type. set to:
 1: No authentication
 2: Peer authentication
Default value: 1
alarmPeriod This parameter determines the The default value is recommended.
time period for certificate
expiration alarm (unit: day).
clientID This parameter determines the This parameter is reserved for
client ID. eSAU. You do not need to set it.
privatekeyDH Encryption mode of the private This parameter cannot be
key. modified.
crlpolicy Policy of CRL The value can be set to
 0: No check
 2: Warning
 3: Disconnection
Default value: 0

 Configure CA certificate-related parameters


The parameter formats of CA certificate are similar as follows:
<AREADESC areaname="root">
<PARAS>
<PARA name="file" value="rootca.pem" />
<PARA name="format" value="PEM" />

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

<PARA name="certStorePwd" value="" />


<PARA name="keyFileName" value="" />
<PARA name="keyStorePwd" value="" />
<PARA name="isTest" value="false" />
<PARA name="isActive" value="true" />
</PARAS>
</AREADESC>

Table 1.2 Parameter description


Parameter Definition Description

file This parameter determines the Set to the CA certificate name.


CA certificate file name.
format This parameter determines the The CA certificate format can be
CA certificate format. set to:
 PEM
 DER
certStorePwd This parameter determines the Set to the CA certificate encryption
password for a certificate that password.
has been encrypted and stored. You do not need to set this
parameter if the CA certificate is
not encrypted.
keyFileName This parameter determines the You do not need to set this
certificate key file name. parameter because key files are not
used.
keyStorePwd This parameter determines the You do not need to set this
password for a key file that has parameter because key files are not
been encrypted and stored. used.
isTest This parameter determines This parameter is reserved and has
whether a test certificate is to be not been used.
installed.
isActive This parameter determines  When the CA certificate is used,
whether a certificate is activated. set the parameter to true.
 When the CA certificate is not
used, set the parameter to false.

 Multiple CA certificates can be installed on an SAU. Configure relevant parameters for each CA
certificate by referring to Table 4-4.
 You are advised to delete the CA certificates and parameter configurations that are not used.
 Configure device configuration-related parameters
The parameter formats of device certificate are similar as follows:
<AREADESC areaname="dev">
<PARAS>
<PARA name="file" value="usercert.pem" />

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

<PARA name="format" value="PEM" />


<PARA name="certStorePwd" value="" />
<PARA name="keyFileName" value="usercert_key.pem" />
<PARA name="keyStorePwd" value="" />
<PARA name="isTest" value="false" />
<PARA name="isActive" value="true" />
</PARAS>
</AREADESC>

Table 1.3 Parameter description


Parameter Definition Description

file This parameter determines the Set to the device certificate name.
device certificate file name.
format This parameter determines the The device certificate format can
device certificate format. be set to:
 PEM
 DER
 PFX
certStorePwd This parameter determines the Set to the device certificate
password for a certificate that encryption password.
has been encrypted and stored. You do not need to set this
parameter if the device certificate
is not encrypted.
keyFileName This parameter determines the Set to the key file name.
name of the certificate key file.
keyStorePwd This parameter determines the Set to the password for encrypting
password for encrypting and the key file.
storing a key file. You do not need to set this
parameter if the key file is not
encrypted.
isTest This parameter determines This parameter is reserved and has
whether a test certificate is to be not been used.
installed.
isActive This parameter determines the Set this parameter to true.
certificate activation.

Only one device certificate can be installed on an SAU. Delete the device certificate that is not used.
 Configure CRL certificate-related parameters
By default, the CRL certificate is not installed on the SAU. To install one or more CRL
certificates and configure relevant parameters, see Configure CA certificate-related
parameters.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Step 4 After the configuration, press Esc to switch to the command mode. Run the :wq! command to
save the file and exit the vi editor.
Step 5 Start the SAU processes for the modifications to take effect.

If... Then...

The EBC service 1. Run the following commands to start SAU processes, including
component is the SAU service processing processes and board management
installed processes (for the EBC service component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_start
2. Check whether all the SAU processes have been started by
referring to 3.4.9.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for
the EBC Service Component).
The EMS service 1. Run the following commands to start SAU processes, including
component is the SAU service processing processes and board management
installed processes (for the EMS service component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start
2. Check whether all the SAU processes have been started by
referring to 3.4.10.1 Checking the Status of SAU Processes (for
the EMS Service Component).

----End

4.2.9 How Do I Query the Occupied Ports on the SAU?


This section describes how to query occupied ports on the SAU.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to an SAU. For detailed operations, see Logging In to the SAU.
Step 2 Run the following command to check the occupied ports on the SAU:
# netstat -tuan
Information similar to the following is displayed, where the information next to : in the Local
Address column indicates the numbers of occupied ports:
omu_136 ~ # netstat -tuan
Active Internet connections (only servers)
Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address Foreign Address State
tcp 0 0 10.0.0.1:8000 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN
tcp 0 0 10.0.0.1:8001 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN
tcp 0 0 10.0.0.1:16002 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN
tcp 0 0 10.0.0.1:16002 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN
tcp 0 0 10.0.0.1:8099 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN
tcp 0 0 10.0.0.1:8100 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

tcp 0 0 10.0.0.1:8006 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN


tcp 0 0 10.0.0.1:8200 0.0.0.0:* LISTEN

----End

4.2.10 How Do I Manually Change the Authentication Key on the


SAU?
This section describes how to manually change the authentication key on an SAU. When an
external system (for example, the Trace Server) accesses an SAU in authentication mode, the
access will fail if the authentication key of the external system is different from that on the
SAU.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.
Step 2 Run the script for setting the environment variable based on the external systems.

If the external system is... Then...

Trace Server Run the following commands on the SAU board where
the EMS service component is installed:
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh

EBC Run the following commands on the SAU board where


the EBC service component is installed:
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh

Step 3 Run the following command to change the authentication key:


# ${FRAME_ROOT}/script/admin/changeToken.sh

Enter the old password and new password as system prompt.


When the following information is displayed, the authentication key is changed successfully:
Change Token Success

 The default authentication key is ei*b+@b#6Nh(tS1j.


 The new key must contain 16 characters, including:
 At least one digit
 At least one lowercase letter
 At least one uppercase letter
 At least one of the following special characters: ` ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * () - _ = + \ | [ { } ] ; : " , < . > / ?
and space
When a space is used in a key, it cannot be placed at the end of the key.

Step 4 Restart SAU processes to make the modification take effect.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

1. Perform the following operation to stop SAU processes based on service component
deployed on the blade.
If the service Then...
component is...

Trace Server see 3.4.10.3 Stopping SAU Processes (for the EMS Service
Component)
EBC see 3.4.9.3 Stopping SAU Processes (for the EBC Service
Component)

2. Perform the following operation to start SAU processes based on service component
deployed on the blade.
If the service Then...
component is...

Trace Server see 3.4.10.2 Starting SAU Processes (for the EMS Service
Component)
EBC see 3.4.9.2 Starting SAU Processes (for the EBC Service
Component)

----End

4.2.11 How Do I Enable or Disable the SSL Renegotiation


Function on the SAU?
The SSL re-negotiation function is a standard security function defined in SSL protocols. This
function improves transmission security by replacing the encryption algorithm and cipher key
upon scheduled re-negotiation for a long-time communications session. This section describes
how to enable or disable the SSL renegotiation function on the SAU.

Context
 The SSL renegotiation function on the SAU is enabled by default.
 When the SSL renegotiation function on the SAU is enabled, you need to set the SSL
renegotiation period. This prevents malicious clients from frequently performing SSL
renegotiation with the SAU, making valid clients fail to set up SSL connections with the
SAU due to a high CPU usage of the SAU.
 For the SAU working with BSC6900 V900R016C00, BSC6910 V100R016C00, or a
later version, the SSL renegotiation function is consistent with that on the OMU, and the
information is automatically synchronized to the SAU. In this case, you can enable or
disable the SSL renegotiation function on the SAU by enabling or disabling the function
on the OMU. No manual operations are required on SAU.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Step 2 Run the config_json_ssl_renego.sh script.

If the service component Then...


is...

EBC 1. Run the following commands to execute the


environment variable:
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
2. Run the following commands to execute the
config_json_ssl_renego.sh script:
# cd /opt/ebcsau/script/admin
# chmod +x config_json_ssl_renego.sh
# ./config_json_ssl_renego.sh

EMS 1. Run the following commands to execute the


environment variable:
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
2. Run the following commands to execute the
config_json_ssl_renego.sh script:
# cd /opt/emssau/script/admin
# chmod +x config_json_ssl_renego.sh
# ./config_json_ssl_renego.sh

The following information is displayed:


**************************************************************
* *
* Welcome to SSL Renegotiation Config tool *
* < version : 1.1 > *
* *
**************************************************************
1 - Display SSL Renegotiation Status
2 - Enable SSL Renegotiation
3 - Disable SSL Renegotiation
4 - Exit
Please select:

Step 3 Enable or disable the SSL renegotiation function.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

If you need to... Then...

Query the status of Type 1 and press Enter.


the SSL renegotiation  If the system displays the following information, the SSL
function renegotiation function is disabled.
SSL Renegotiation is Disable.
 When the system displays the following information, the SSL
renegotiation function is enabled and the renegotiation
period is 60 minutes.
SSL Renegotiation is Enable.
Interval of Renegotiation is 60 minute(s).

Enable the SSL 1. Type 2 and press Enter.


renegotiation 2. Type y as prompted.
function and set the Do you want to continue? [y/n] y
renegotiation period
3. Type an integer number ranging from 0 to 60 to set the SSL
renegotiation period.
Please input the interval of renegotiation [(0~60)
default : 60 minute(s)] : 30

NOTE
 The SSL renegotiation period indicates how long a new renegotiation
request can be handled following the previous renegotiation. The
value range is 0-60 minutes. The default value is 60 minutes.
 When the system displays The SSL renegotiation is
enabled and the interval is set to 30., the SSL
renegotiation function is enabled and the renegotiation period is set to
30 minutes.

Disable the SSL 1. Type 3 and press Enter.


renegotiation 2. Type y as prompted.
function Do you want to continue? [y/n] y

When the system displays The SSL renegotiation


is disabled., the SSL renegotiation function is
disabled.

Step 4 Type 4 as prompted to exit the script.


Step 5 Run the RST SAU command to perform a warm reset on the SAU for the configuration to
take effect.
----End

4.2.12 How Do I Set SSL Configuration Parameters on the SAU by


Running Commands on the Server?
You have to manually set SSL configuration parameters by running commands on the server
for the SAU working with versions earlier than BSC6900 V900R016C00 or BSC6910
V100R016C00.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.

Context
 For the SAU working with BSC6900 V900R016C00 or BSC6910 V100R016C00, or a
later version, the OMU automatically synchronizes SSL parameter configurations to the
SAU. No manual operations are required.
 SSL parameters include connection type, authentication mode, and renegotiation
parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Perform related operations based on SSL parameters.

SSL Parameter Configuration Method

Connection type For details, see Step 2.


Authentication mode For details, see Step 3.
Renegotiation parameter For details, see 4.2.11 How Do I Enable or
Disable the SSL Renegotiation Function on the
SAU?.

Step 2 Configure the connection type.


 SSL connection: The SAU always supports SSL connections. No further operations are
required.
 Common connection: The JSON non-encrypted port determines whether common
connections are supported. If the JSON non-encrypted port is opened, common
connections are supported. Otherwise, common connections are not supported. For
details about how to open and close the JSON non-encrypted port, see 4.2.7 How Do I
Open and Close the Non-Encrypted Json Port of the SAU?.
Step 3 Perform the following steps to configure the authentication mode:
1. Stop SAU processes.

If both the EBC and EMS service components have been deployed on the SAU board, you only need to
stop the process of the service component you want to set or modify.

If the service Then...


component is...

EBC Run the following command to stop SAU service processing


processes (for the EBC service component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop
If the command output contains All processes have been
stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service processes

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

If the service Then...


component is...

are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ebc_kill command to forcibly


stop the service processes.
EMS Run the following commands to stop SAU service processing
processes (for the EMS service component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop
If the command output contains All processes have been
stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service processes
are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ems_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.

2. Run the following command to navigate to the directory that stores the cerConfig.xml
configuration file.
If the service Then...
component is...

EBC Run the following command:


# cd /opt/ebcsau/etc/Certificate

EMS Run the following command:


# cd /opt/emssau/etc/Certificate

3. Run the following command to modify the cerConfig.xml configuration file:


# vi cerConfig.xml
Press i to enter the editing mode. Find the authentication mode parameter and change the
parameter value. For details about the authentication mode parameters, see Table 4-6.
<AREADESC areaname="option">
<PARAS>
...
<PARA name="enableAuthType" value="2" />
...
</PARAS>
</AREADESC>

Table 1.1 Authentication mode parameter


Parameter Description Value Description

enableAuthType SSL-based authentication The values are as follows:


mode  1: not authenticated
 2: peer-end authenticated

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Parameter Description Value Description

Default value: 1

4. After parameters are configured, press Esc to switch to the command mode. Run the
:wq! command to save the file and exit the vi editor.
5. Run the following commands to start the SAU processes for the modifications on
configuration file to take effect.
If the service Then...
component is...

EBC Run the following commands:


# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_start

EMS Run the following commands:


# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start

----End

4.2.13 How Do I Set FTP Client Parameters on the SAU by


Running Commands on the Server?
You have to manually set FTP client parameters by running commands on the server for the
SAU working with versions earlier than BSC6900 V900R016C00 or BSC6910
V100R016C00.

Prerequisites
You have logged in to the SAU. For details, see 3.1.4 Logging In to the SAU.

Context
You can run the SET SAUFTPSCLT and LST SAUFTPSCLT commands to set and query
FTP client parameters, respectively, for the SAU working with BSC6900 V900R016C00,
BSC6910 V100R016C00, and later versions.

Procedure
Step 1 Stop SAU processes.

If both the EBC and EMS service components have been deployed on the SAU board, you only need to
stop the process of the service component you want to set or modify.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

If the service Then...


component is...

EBC Run the following command to stop SAU service processing


processes (for the EBC service component):
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_stop
If the command output contains All processes have been
stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service processes
are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ebc_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.
EMS Run the following commands to stop SAU service processing
processes (for the EMS service component):
# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_stop
If the command output contains All processes have been
stopped successfully!, it indicates that all service processes
are stopped. Otherwise, run the sau4ems_kill command to forcibly
stop the service processes.

Step 2 Run the following command to navigate to the directory that stores the ftpsclient.xml
configuration file.

If the service Then...


component is...

EBC Run the following command:


# cd /opt/ebcsau/etc/conf/FtpsClient

EMS Run the following command:


# cd /opt/emssau/etc/conf/FtpsClient

Step 3 Perform the following steps to modify the ftpsclient.xml configuration file:
1. Run the following command to modify the ftpsclient.xml configuration file:
# vi ftpsclient.xml
Press i to enter the editing mode. Find the related FTP client parameters as shown in the
command output. Then, change the parameter values. For details about FTP client
parameters, see Table 4-7.
<policy encrypted_mode="0" support_statefwl="0" command_port="21"
data_port="20" transfer_mode="1" transfer_size="4096"
progress_interval="5" min_port="25001" max_port="30000" ccc_suport="1"
client_num="500" time_out="30" enable_authtype="2" ssl_version="1">
</policy>

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Table 1.1 FTP client parameters


Parameter Description Field in MML Value Description
Commands

encrypted_mode Encrypted mode ENCRYMODE  0: autonegotiation


 1: ftp
 2: ftps
Default value: 0
support_statefwl FTP mode TRANSMODE  0: automatic
 1: active
 2: passive
Default value: 0
command_port Command port to None Default value: 21
which the FTP client Retain the default
is connected value.
data_port Data port to which None Default value: 20
the FTP client is Retain the default
connected value.
transfer_mode Transfer mode None  1: Binary mode
 2: ASCII mode
Default value: 1
Retain the default
value.
transfer_size Message length None Default value: 4096
Retain the default
value.
progress_interval Process query None Default value: 5
interval Retain the default
value.
min_port Lower threshold of STARTPORT Default value:
the data port number 25001. Retain the
in active mode default value.
max_port Upper threshold of ENDPORT Default value:
the data port number 30000.
in active mode Retain the default
value.
ccc_suport Whether the state SPTSTATEFWL  0: not supported
firewall is supported  1: supported
Default value: 1
client_num Maximum number None Default value: 500
of clients Retain the default

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU)
User Guide FAQsFAQs

Parameter Description Field in MML Value Description


Commands

value.
time_out Timeout for None Default value: 30
receiving data Retain the default
Unit: second value.
enable_authtype Whether SSL-based SSLCERTAUTH  1: not
digital certificate authenticated
authentication is  2: peer-end
supported authenticated
Default value: 1
ssl_version SSL protocol None  1: Negotiated
version< version during
handshaking
 2: SSL 2.0
 3: SSL 3.0
 4: TLS 1.0
 5: TLS 1.1
 6: TLS 1.2
Default value: 1

2. After parameters are configured, press Esc to switch to the command mode. Run the
:wq! command to save the file and exit the vi editor.
Step 4 Run the following commands to start the SAU processes for the modifications on
configuration file to take effect.

If the service component Then...


is...

EBC Run the following commands:


# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_start

EMS Run the following commands:


# cd /opt/emssau
# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ems_start

----End

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

5 Appendix A: SAU Command Reference

About This Chapter


This chapter describes commands that are used when you use Huawei devices to deploy and
maintain network. For advanced maintenance commands used to locate problems in some
faulty scenarios where the regular maintenance methods cannot locate problem and
commands that cannot be executed manually by users, the device may contain errors or the
service may be interrupted if these two kinds of commands are incorrectly used. If you need
these two kinds of commands, apply to Huawei for required documents.
5.1 Linux Commands
This section describes the utility commands provided by the Linux system, including the
commands for operating directories, the commands for files, commands for viewing files,
commands for managing Linux users, the commands for managing system resources, and
commands for network communication.
5.2 SAU MML Commands
This section describes the MML commands related to the SAU in the BSC6910 and
BSC6900.
5.3 SAU Commands
This chapter provides the common commands related to SAU services required for SAU
software operation.

5.1 Linux Commands


This section describes the utility commands provided by the Linux system, including the
commands for operating directories, the commands for files, commands for viewing files,
commands for managing Linux users, the commands for managing system resources, and
commands for network communication.

5.1.1 route Command


This section describes the function, format, parameter options, and application example of the
route command. You can run the route command to modify and maintain the routing table.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Function
The routing table relays IP addresses between network segments. The route command is used
to modify and maintain the routing table.

Format
route -CFvnee
route -v -A family add -net|-host target netmask gw
route -v -A family del -net|-host target netmask gw

The meaning of "|" is the same as that of the word "or".

Authorized User
This command is executed by user root.

Parameter Description
Options of the route command can be combined. Table 5-1 lists the common options.

Table 1.1 Description of the route command options


Option Description

-F Perform operations in the routing table.


-C Perform operations in the cache of a router.
-v Display details.
-n Display information in characters instead of symbols.
-e Display the routing table. The -ee command is used to
display the information about all the parameters in the
routing table.
-A family It is a variable, indicating an address family such as inet. You
can run the route --help command to query the address
family table.
add Add a route.
del Delete a route.
-net It indicates that the destination is a network section.
-host It indicates that the destination is a host.
target It is a variable, indicating the IP address of the destination
host or network section. For example, 10.11.12.0 stands for
section 10.11.12.
netmask Subnet mask
gw IP address of the gateway

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Option Description

Application Example
 Check the information about the routing table.
root@osssvr # route -ne
Kernel IP routing table
Destination Gateway Genmask Flags MSS Window
irtt Iface
10.71.15.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 U 0 0
0 eth2
10.254.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 U 0 0
0 eth2
127.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 U 0 0
0 lo
0.0.0.0 10.71.15.1 0.0.0.0 UG 0 0
0 eth2

 Add a route.
root@osssvr # route add -net 10.71.15.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 gw 10.71.15.1
root@osssvr # route -ne
Kernel IP routing table
Destination Gateway Genmask Flags MSS Window irtt Iface
10.71.15.0 10.71.15.1 255.255.255.0 UG 0 0 0 eth2
10.71.15.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 U 0 0 0 eth2
10.254.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 U 0 0 0 eth2
127.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 U 0 0 0 lo
0.0.0.0 10.71.15.1 0.0.0.0 UG 0 0 0 eth2

The 10.71.15.0 10.71.15.1 255.255.255.0 UG 0 0


0 eth2 in the previous message is the new route.
 Delete a route.
root@osssvr # route del -net 10.71.15.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 gw 10.71.15.1
Run the following command to check whether the route is deleted from the routing tale:
root@osssvr # route -ne

5.1.2 ifconfig Command


This section describes the function, syntax, and parameter options of the ifconfig command
and provides an application example. By running the ifconfig command, you can view the IP
address of a host.

Function
The ifconfig command is used for viewing the IP address of the host.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Syntax
ifconfig option

Authorized User
This command is executed by user root.

Options
-a: views the information about all the addresses.
 -a: views the information about all the addresses.
 bond1: views the fixed external IP address, broadcast IP address, and subnet mask.
 vlan1: views the fixed internal IP address, broadcast IP address, and subnet mask.
 bond2: views the debugging IP address, broadcast IP address, and subnet mask.

Example
To view the IP address of the host, run the following command:
# ifconfig -a
bond0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:C6
inet6 addr: fe80::225:9eff:fe96:bbc6/64 Scope:Link
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MASTER MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:5979810 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:551223 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0
RX bytes:375631320 (358.2 Mb) TX bytes:23272066 (22.1 Mb)

bond1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:CA


inet addr:10.141.146.201 Bcast:10.141.147.255 Mask:255.255.252.0
inet6 addr: fe80::225:9eff:fe96:bbca/64 Scope:Link
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MASTER MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:17596779 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:11675480 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0
RX bytes:3849948207 (3671.5 Mb) TX bytes:1399923390 (1335.0 Mb)

bond2 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:C8


inet addr:192.168.6.50 Bcast:192.168.6.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST MASTER MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0
RX bytes:0 (0.0 b) TX bytes:0 (0.0 b)

bond3 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:C9


inet addr:192.168.3.50 Bcast:192.168.3.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
inet6 addr: fe80::225:9eff:fe96:bbc9/64 Scope:Link
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MASTER MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:12742 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:7 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

RX bytes:2760352 (2.6 Mb) TX bytes:556 (556.0 b)

eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:C6


UP BROADCAST SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:0 (0.0 b) TX bytes:0 (0.0 b)

eth1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:C6


UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:5979810 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:551223 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:375631320 (358.2 Mb) TX bytes:23272066 (22.1 Mb)

eth2 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:C8


UP BROADCAST SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:0 (0.0 b) TX bytes:0 (0.0 b)
Interrupt:169

eth3 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:C9


UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:12742 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:7 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:2760352 (2.6 Mb) TX bytes:556 (556.0 b)
Interrupt:50

eth4 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:CA


UP BROADCAST SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:663912 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:91 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:54810258 (52.2 Mb) TX bytes:6578 (6.4 Kb)
Interrupt:169

eth5 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:CA


UP BROADCAST RUNNING SLAVE MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:16932867 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:11675389 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:3795137949 (3619.3 Mb) TX bytes:1399916812 (1335.0 Mb)
Interrupt:50

lo Link encap:Local Loopback


inet addr:127.0.0.1 Mask:255.0.0.0
inet6 addr: ::1/128 Scope:Host
UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU:16436 Metric:1
RX packets:403690 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:403690 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

RX bytes:34108002 (32.5 Mb) TX bytes:34108002 (32.5 Mb)

vlan1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:25:9E:96:BB:C6


inet addr:172.16.3.250 Bcast:172.255.255.255 Mask:255.0.0.0
inet6 addr: fe80::225:9eff:fe96:bbc6/64 Scope:Link
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MASTER MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:5979810 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:551219 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0
RX bytes:291913980 (278.3 Mb) TX bytes:23271766 (22.1 Mb)

In the preceding example, the displayed IP addresses of the host are as follows: The external IP address
is 10.141.146.201, the debugging IP address is 192.168.6.50, and the internal IP address is 172.16.3.250.

5.1.3 ping Command


This section describes the function, format, parameter options, and application examples of
the ping command.

Function
The ping command is used to check the physical connection of the network when the
communication between a PC and the hosts in the network is interrupted.

Format
ping IP address of a host

Example
Check the physical connection between the current host and the host whose IP address is
10.71.15.1.
# ping 10.71.15.1
PING 10.71.15.1 (10.71.15.1) 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from 10.71.15.1: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time=11.5 ms
64 bytes from 10.71.15.1: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time=7.11 ms
64 bytes from 10.71.15.1: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time=7.77 ms

You can press Ctrl+Z (case insensitive) to stop running the ping command.

The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is used through the ping command to check
the network connection. An ICMP echo request message is sent to a specific host to request an
ICMP echo response message. If the response message is not received within a specified time,
the Host unreachable message is displayed on the screen.

The Host unreachable message is displayed in the following cases:


 The specified host is invalid.
 The physical connection of the network is not secure.
 The two communicating hosts do not support the same communication protocol.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

To analyze the causes, run the ping command to connect to other hosts in the same network
segment. If the ping command is successful, you can infer that the connection is functional. In
this case, check the physical connection and the operational status of the specified host. If the
ping command fails, check whether the physical network connection of the current host is
secure or whether the TCP/IP protocol is set correctly.

5.2 SAU MML Commands


This section describes the MML commands related to the SAU in the BSC6910 and
BSC6900.

The following provides cautions for using SAU-related MML commands.


 The MML commands vary from one NE type to another when the SAU is used with
different NE types.
 The MML commands vary slightly from one NE version to another when the SAU is used
with different versions of an NE type.
 The document provides SAU MML commands only for the latest NE versions. To learn
details, see the MML Command Reference of the related NE version. You can also view
MML commands on the NE's Web LMT.
 You can use the following MML commands only when the SAU is used with BSC6900
V900R016C00/BSC6910 V100R016C00 or later.
 SET SAUFTPSCLT
 LST SAUFTPSCLT

5.2.1 SAU MML Commands (BSC6900)


This section describes the MML commands related to the SAU in the BSC6900.

5.2.1.1 Display the Information of SAU(DSP SAU)

Function
Use this command to query the information about the SAU. The information includes the
running state of the SAU, fixed IP addresses, and version.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

GUI Value Range: 0~11


Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To query the information about the SAU, run the following command:
DSP SAU:;

%%DSP SAU:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

SAU server state


----------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Ftp Center = YES
Computer name = dopra_linux
Internal network fixed IP = 172.16.3.240
External network fixed IP = 10.145.22.213
Operational state = Normal
Version = SAU V600R011C00SPC100
(Number of results = 1)

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of SAU.


Slot No. Slot No. of SAU.
Ftp Center Whether the SAU functions as the FTP
center.
Computer name Computer name.
Internal network fixed IP Internal network fixed IP.
External network fixed IP External network fixed IP.
Operational state Normal, Fault.
Version Version No of active work area.

5.2.1.2 Display SAU Work Area Information(DSP SAUAREA)

Function
Use this command to query the version information of the SAU area.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To switch over the working area of the SAU, run the following command:
DSP SAUAREA:;

%%DSP SAUAREA:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

SAU workarea status


-------------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Workarea flag = version_a
Mainarea version = SAU V600R011C00SPC100
Standbyarea version = <NULL>
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of SAU.


Slot No. Slot No. of SAU.
Workarea flag Directory where the active SAU workspace
is installed.
Mainarea version Version of the software installed on the

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Domain Name Description

active SAU workspace.


Standbyarea version Version of the software installed on the
standby SAU workspace.

5.2.1.3 Display Modules State on SAU(DSP SAUMODULE)

Function
Use this command to query the running state of modules on the SAU.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To query the state of the SAU, run the following command:
DSP SAUMODULE:;

%%DSP SAUMODULE:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

State of SAU modules in slot 23 of subrack 0


--------------------------------------------
Service name State Startup type

host_gate Started Automatic


ftp_server Started Automatic
sntp Started Automatic
sau_manager Started Automatic
data_server Started Automatic
alarm Started Automatic
debug_log Started Automatic
(Number of results = 7)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Service name Module Name.


State SAU Module State: Started, Stopped,
Exception.
Startup type Startup Type: Automatic, Disabled.

5.2.1.4 Display SAU Server State(DSP SAUSRV)

Function
Use this command to query the state of the SAU Server.

Note
None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To query the state of the SAU server, run the following command:
DSP SAUSRV:;

%%DSP SAUSRV:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

State of the SAU in slot 23 of subrack 0 (CPU&MEM)


--------------------------------------------------
CPU(%) = 1%
MEM(%) = 1%
IO(%) = 0%
Logical CPU = 16
Memory capacity(MB) = 31776

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

(Number of results = 1)

State of the SAU in slot 23 of subrack 0 (Logical harddisk)


-----------------------------------------------------------
Logical harddisk = /dev/sda1
Total space(M) = 5041
Free space(M) = 4710
Free space(%) = 93%

Logical harddisk = /dev/sda6


Total space(M) = 5041
Free space(M) = 4894
Free space(%) = 97%

Logical harddisk = /dev/sda3


Total space(M) = 5041
Free space(M) = 4847
Free space(%) = 96%

Logical harddisk = /dev/sda8


Total space(M) = 520946
Free space(M) = 518264
Free space(%) = 99%

Logical harddisk = /dev/sda5


Total space(M) = 5041
Free space(M) = 4903
Free space(%) = 97%

Logical harddisk = /dev/sda7


Total space(M) = 5041
Free space(M) = 4855
Free space(%) = 96%
(Number of results = 6)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

CPU(%) CPU usage.


MEM(%) Memory usage.
IO(%) IO usage.
Logical CPU Number of the logical CPU.
Memory capacity(MB) Capacity of the physical memory.
Logical harddisk Name of the logical hard disk driver.
Total space(M) Space of the logical hard disk.
Free space(M) Available space of the logical hard disk.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Domain Name Description

Free space(%) Percent of the available space of the logical


hard disk.

5.2.1.5 Display SAU Business Instance(DSP SAUINSTANCE)

Function
This command is used to query the SAU business instance at SAU board.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Example
To query the SAU business instance at SAU board, run the following command:
DSP SAUINSTANCE:;

The result is as follows:


%%DSP SAUINSTANCE:SRN=0,SN=23;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

SAU business instance infomation


----------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
NASTAR Instance version = SAUV600R002C00SPC020
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of SAU.


Slot No. Slot No. of SAU.
EBC Instance version The version of EBC Instance in this board.
EMS Instance version The version of EMS Instance in this board.

5.2.1.6 Display SAU Certificate Synchronization Status(DSP


SAUCERTFILE)

Function
Use this command to query the certificate synchronization status of the SAU.

Note
Only the system administrator can run this command.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning:


GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

MML Default Value: None


Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SN Slot No. Meaning:
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
Use this command to query the certificate synchronization status of the SAU:
DSP SAUCERTFILE: SRN=0, SN=23;

%%DSP SAUCERTFILE: SRN=0, SN=23;%%


RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

Query The Certificate Synchronization Status Of The SAU


-------------------------------------------------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Status Of Certificate Synchronization = Consistent
Device Certificate = usercert.pem
CA Certificate List = rootca.pem, cacrt.pem
CRL File List = certcrl.crl, huaweicrl.crl
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Number of the subrack that houses the SAU.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Domain Name Description

Slot No. Number of the slot where the SAU is


located.
Status Of Certificate Synchronization Status Of Certificate Synchronization,if the
certificates on the SAU is inconsistent with
those on the OMU, the SAU immediately
synchronizes the certificates from the OMU.
Device Certificate The device certificates to be synchronized.
CA Certificate List List of the CA certificates to be
synchronized.
CRL File List List of the CRL File to be synchronized.

5.2.1.7 Reset SAU Service(RST SAU)

Function
Use this command to reset the software or hardware of the SAU.

Note
1. If the reset type is SOFT, the SAU software is reset. If the reset type is HARD, the SAU
hardware is reset.
2. When multiple SAUs are configured, all the SAUs will be reset if the subrack number and
slot number are not specified.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

TP Reset Type Meaning: After the software


is reset, the PC is not
restarted.
GUI Value Range:
SOFT(Soft Reset),
HARD(Hard Reset)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: SOFT,
HARD
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the
subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
1. To reset the hardware of the SAU( (Subrack No. = 0, Slot No. = 23)), run the
following command:
RST SAU: TP=HARD, SRN=0, SN=23;

%%RST SAU: TP=HARD, SRN=0, SN=23;%%


RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

Running result
--------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

State = Success
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

2. To reset the software of the SAU( (Subrack No. = 0, Slot No. = 23)), run the
following command:
RST SAU: TP=SOFT, SRN=0, SN=23;

%%RST SAU: TP=SOFT, SRN=0, SN=23;%%


RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

Running result
--------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
State = Success
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

5.2.1.8 Swap SAU Work Area(SWP SAUAREA)

Function
Use this command to switch over the working area of the SAU.

Note
1. Switching the working area of the SAU changes the version and data of the SAU and
disrupts the services on the SAU.
2. To keep normal SAU switchover, you should ensure that the standby working area of the
SAU is normally installed.
3. Before running this command, you should ensure that no other operations are performed on
the SAU.
4. When multiple SAUs are configured, the work areas of all the SAUs will be switched over
if the subrack number and slot number are not specified.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Recommended Value: None


Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
1. To switch over the working area of the SAU (Subrack No. = 0, Slot No. = 23),
run the following command:
SWP SAUAREA: SRN=0, SN=23;

%%SWP SAUAREA: SRN=0, SN=23;%%


RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

Running result
--------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
State = Success
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

5.2.1.9 Set SAU FTP Center(SET SAUCENTER)

Function
This command is used to specify whether to set the SAU board in a specified slot to the FTP
center.

Note
1. When setting an SAU as the FTP center, the state of the SAU must be normal. Otherwise,
command execution on the SAU will fail.
2. Data reception on the SAU may temporarily fail during a switch of the SAU FTP center.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

FTPCENTER Ftp Center Switch Meaning: This parameter is


used to specify whether to
set the SAU board in
specified slot to the FTP
center.
GUI Value Range: OFF(the
SAU board is not set to the
FTP center), ON(the SAU
board is set to the FTP
center)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: ON,
OFF
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the
subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only
when FTPCENTER is set

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

to ON. This parameter must


be set when FTPCENTER
is set to ON.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only
when FTPCENTER is set
to ON. This parameter must
be set when FTPCENTER
is set to ON.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To set an SAU as the FTP center (Subrack N0. = 1, Slot No. = 23), run the
following command:
SET SAUCENTER: FTPCENTER=ON, SRN=0, SN=23;

5.2.1.10 List SAU FTP Center(LST SAUCENTER)

Function
Use this command to query the subrack and slot information about the SAU that functions as
the FTP center.

Note
None

Parameters
None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Example
To query the subrack and slot information about the SAU that functions as the FTP
center, run the following command:
LST SAUCENTER:;

%%LST SAUCENTER:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

Center of SAU
-------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of SAU.


Slot No. Slot No. of SAU.

5.2.1.11 List SAU SSL Configuration(LST SAUSSLCONF)

Function
Use this command to query the SSL configuration of the SAU.

Note
Only the system administrator can run this command.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning:


GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Impact on Network
Performance: None
SN Slot No. Meaning:
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To query the SAU SSL configuration, run the following command:
LST SAUSSLCONF:SRN=0, SN=23;

%%LST SAUSSLCONF:SRN=0, SN=23;%%


RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

List SAU SSL Configuration


-----------------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Connection Type = ALL Type
Authentication Mode = Verify None
Renegotiation Switch = Enable
Renegotiation Interval = 60
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Number of the subrack that houses the SAU.


Slot No. Number of the slot where the SAU is
located.
Connection Type See the parameter description of the SET
CONNTYPE command.
Authentication Mode See the parameter description of the SET

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Domain Name Description

SSLAUTHMODE command.
Renegotiation Switch See the parameter description of the SET
SSLCONF command.
Renegotiation Interval See the parameter description of the SET
SSLCONF command.

5.2.1.12 Add Board(ADD BRD)

Function
Use this command to add a board. This command can be used by all types of boards except
the SCUa, SCUb, GCUa, GCUb, GCGa and GCGb.

Note
1. Configure the boards in the following sequence: XPU, TNU, INT/DPU/NIU, OMU/SAU.
2. After a subrack is added, the SCUa/SCUb boards are configured in slots 6 and 7 by default
and cannot be removed. The GCUa boards are automatically configured in slots 12 and 13 in
the MPS and cannot be removed.
3. When adding the boards that are in active/standby mode, set SN to an even number. The
active and standby boards can be added at the same time by running this command once.
4. If the subrack is in effective mode and the board added by this command has been installed,
the board immediately starts and performs internal configuration after this command is
executed. When a board is during internal configuration, other commands cannot be executed.
To check whether any board is during internal configuration, run the DSP BRD command.
5. The precautions for adding an XPU board are as follows:
1) The XPU board with the logical function of RGCP or RUCP manages resources and must
be configured preferentially. It is recommended that you configure one XPUa/SPUa board out
of every six pairs of XPUa/SPUa boards to be of the RGCP/RUCP type, and configure one
XPUb/SPUb/XPUc/SPUc board out of every three pairs of XPUb/SPUb/XPUc/SPUc boards
to be of the RGCP/RUCP type.
2) When adding an XPU board with the logical function of GCP or UCP to the MPS or EPS,
bind the added board with the board where the MPU subsystem is located.
3) An XPU board cannot be configured in slot 24 or 25 of the MPS.
6. The precautions for adding a TNU board are as follows:
1) A TNU board is needed in TDM networking mode to maintain the inter-subrack TDM
service switching capability.
2) TNUa or TNUb boards must be configured in active/standby mode in slot 4.
3) When adding TNU boards to the MPS or EPS, bind the added boards with the board where
the MPU subsystem is located.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

4) When adding a TNUa or TNUb board, set Add inter-subrack path automatically based
on the actual conditions. You can query the inter-subrack path by running the LST
SRCONPATH command.
7. The precautions for adding an INT board are as follows:
1) When adding an INT board to the MPS or EPS, bind the added board with the board where
the MPU subsystem is located.
2) Before adding an EIUa/EIUb (Abis_TDM/Ater_TDM/Pb_TDM/A_TDM), OIUa/OIUb
(Abis_TDM/Ater_TDM/Pb_TDM/A_TDM), or POUc (TDM) board, ensure that the TNUa or
TNUb board has been configured.
3) When adding an EIUa/EIUb (Abis_TDM/Ater_TDM/Pb_TDM/A_TDM), OIUa/OIUb
(Abis_TDM/Ater_TDM/Pb_TDM/A_TDM), or POUc (TDM) board, it is recommended that
you set RED to YES. This avoids that reliability of the interface board to be added does not
decrease.
4) During site deployment or capacity expansion, it is recommended that you configure the
FG2c, GOUc, GOUe, FG2d, GOUd, and UOIc boards in slots 16 to 23.
8. The precautions for adding a DPU board are as follows:
1) When adding a DPU board to the MPS or EPS, bind the added board with the board where
the MPU subsystem is located.
2) Before adding the DPUa (GTC), DPUb (GTC/GPCU), DPUc (GTC), DPUd (GPCU),
DPUe/DPUh (GPCU), DPUf (GTC), or DPUg/DPUj (GPCU) board, ensure that an XPU
board with the logical function of RGCP or GCP has been configured. Otherwise, software
loading fails in the DSP.
3) Before adding the DPUb (UUP) or DPUe/DPUh (UUP) board, ensure that an XPU board
with the logical function of RUCP or UCP has been configured. Otherwise, software loading
fails in the DSP.
9. The precautions for adding an NIU board are as follows:
1) An NIU board can only be configured in the MPS or EPS. When adding an NIU board,
bind the added board with the board where the MPU subsystem is located.
10. The precautions for adding an OMU board are as follows:
1) An OMU board can only be configured in the MPS.
2) An OMUa or OMUb board occupies two slots and an OMUc board occupies one slot.
3) If the BSC6900 works in single-OMU mode and an OMUa/OMUb board is configured, the
OMUa/OMUb board can be installed in slot 0, 2, 21, 23, 25, or 27. If the BSC6900 works in
single-OMU mode and an OMUc board is configured, the OMUc board can be installed in
slots 0-3 or slots 20-27.
4) If the BSC works in dual-OMU mode and two OMUa/OMUb boards are configured, the
OMUa/OMUb boards can be installed in slots 0 and 2, 21 and 23, or 25 and 27. If the
BSC6900 works in dual-OMU mode and two OMUc boards are configured, the OMUc
boards can be installed in slots 0 and 1, 2 and 3, 20 and 21, 22 and 23, 24 and 25, or 26 and
27.
5) If the BSC6900 works in dual-OMU mode and one OMUa/OMUb board and one OMUc
board are configured, the OMUa/OMUb board can be installed in slot 0, 2, 21, 23, 25, or 27,
and the OMUc board must be installed adjacent to the OMUa/OMUb board. That is, the

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

OMUa/OMUb board and the OMUc board must be in slots 0 and 2, slots 21 and 23, or slots
25 and 27.
11. The precautions for adding an SAU board are as follows:
1) The SAU boards must be installed in the lowest subrack of the cabinet for good heat
dissipation.
2) An SAUa board occupies two slots and an SAUc board occupies one slot.
3) If an SAUa/SAUc board is added by running this command, a soft reset of this
SAUa/SAUc board must be implemented by running the RST SAU command.
12. A pair of active and standby MPU subsystems can simultaneously manage a maximum of:
1) 32 EIUa, EIUb, OIUa, and OIUb boards as well as POUc boards whose logical function
type is TDM.
2) 14 AEUa, PEUa, PEUc, AOUa, AOUc, UOIa, UOIc, FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc,
GOUe, GOUd, and POUa boards as well as POUc boards whose logical function type is IP.
Note that one pair of active and standby boards are still considered as one board here. For
example, a pair of active and standby MPU subsystems can manage 14 OIUa boards and 14
pairs of active and standby OIUb boards.
13. After a board is started, the counter value for the board is unreliable in the first
measurement period.
14. When an AOUa/AOUc/UOIa/UOIc/FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc/GOUe/FG2d/GOUd board
is added to a BSC, the physical ports for the boards are automatically configured. The total
number of ATM logical ports, IP logical ports, resource groups, and physical ports configured
for a BSC must not exceed 8192.
15. An MPU can simultaneously manage 14 pairs of interface boards using IP, ATM, and
HDLC transmission modes.
16. A maximum number of five NIUa boards can be configured for an MPS. A maximum of
six NIUa boards can be configured for an EPS. The total number of
DPUa/DPUb/DPUc/DPUd/DPUe/DPUf/DPUg and NIUa boards configured for a subrack
cannot exceed 15.
17. A maximum number of 5 POUc boards can be configured for one TC subrack. If
EIUa/EIUb/OIUa/OIUb boards are configured in the same TC subrack as the POUc boards, 4
EIUa/EIUb/OIUa/OIUb boards are considered as one POUc board. One pair of active and
standby boards is considered as one board here.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
BRDCLASS Board Class Meaning: Classes of boards
classified according to
function modules
GUI Value Range: INT,
DPU, XPU, TNU, OMU,
SAU, NIU
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: INT,
DPU, XPU, TNU, OMU,
SAU, NIU
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
BRDTYPE Board Type Meaning: Type of the board
GUI Value Range: AEUa,
AOUa, AOUc, DPUa,
DPUb, DPUc, DPUd, DPUe,
DPUf, DPUg, DPUh, DPUj,
EIUa, EIUb, FG2a, FG2c,
FG2d, GOUa, GOUc,
GOUd, GOUe, NIUa, NIUc,
OIUa, OIUb, OMUa,
OMUb, OMUc, PEUa,
PEUc, POUa, POUc, SAUa,
SAUc, SPUa, SPUb, SPUc,
TNUa, TNUb, UOIa, UOIc,
XPUa, XPUb, XPUc
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: AEUa,
AOUa, AOUc, DPUa,
DPUb, DPUc, DPUd, DPUe,
DPUf, DPUg, DPUh, DPUj,

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

EIUa, EIUb, FG2a, FG2c,


FG2d, GOUa, GOUc,
GOUd, GOUe, NIUa, NIUc,
OIUa, OIUb, OMUa,
OMUb, OMUc, PEUa,
PEUc, POUa, POUc, SAUa,
SAUc, SPUa, SPUb, SPUc,
TNUa, TNUb, UOIa, UOIc,
XPUa, XPUb, XPUc
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only
when BRDCLASS is set to
TNU,DPU,INT,XPU,OMU,
SAU,NIU. This parameter
must be set when
BRDCLASS is set to
TNU,DPU,INT,XPU,OMU,
SAU,NIU.The default value
of "BRDTYPE" is NIUa
when "BRDCLASS" in MO
BRD is set to NIU.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: Yes
Impact on Network
Performance: None
LGCAPPTYPE Logical function type Meaning: Logical function
type of the board
OAM: Operation And
Maintenance Process
TDM_Switching: TDM
switching process
GCP: All the GCP
subsystems are configured
as CPUS to act as the
control plane processing
subsystems for GSM BSC
UCP: All the UCP
subsystems are configured
as CPUS to act as the
control plane processing
subsystems for UMTS RNC
RGCP: Subsystem 0 of
RGCP is configured as the
MPU subsystem to act as the
resource management
subsystem. The other
subsystems are configured

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

as CPUS to act as the


control plane processing
subsystems for GSM BSC
RUCP: Subsystem 0 of
RUCP is configured as the
MPU subsystem to act as the
resource management
subsystem. The other
subsystems are configured
as CPUS to act as the
control plane processing
subsystems for UMTS RNC
MCP: Mathematics
Computing Process, which
includes Interference Based
Channel Allocation (IBCA)
GTC: GSM BSC TC
Process
GPCU: GSM BSC PCU
Process
UUP: UMTS RNC User
plane Process
ATM: AEUa/ATM ATM
over E1/T1/J1 interface,
AOUa/ATM ATM over
channelized Optical STM-
1/OC-3 interface,
AOUc/ATM ATM over
channelized Optical STM-
1/OC-3 interface,
UOIa/ATM ATM over
Unchannelized Optical
STM-1/OC-3 interface,
UOIc/ATM ATM over
Unchannelized Optical
STM-1/OC-3 interface
IP: GOUc/IP IP over GE
Optical interface, GOUa/IP
IP over GE Optical
interface, PEUa/IP IP over
E1/T1/J1 interface, PEUc/IP
IP over E1/T1/J1 interface,
FG2c/IP IP over FE/GE
interface (logical function
type of GbIP not support
configured), FG2a/IP IP
over FE/GE interface,
POUc/IP IP over
channelized Optical STM-
1/OC-3 interface, POUa/IP

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

IP over channelized Optical


STM-1/OC-3 interface,
UOIa/IP IP over
Unchannelized Optical
STM-1/OC-3 interface,
FG2d/IP Electronic FE/GE
interface unit, GOUd/IP GE
Optical interface Unit,
GOUe/IP IP over GE
Optical interface
FR: PEUa/FR Frame Relay
over E1/T1/J1 interface,
PEUc/FR Frame Relay over
E1/T1/J1 interface
HDLC: PEUa/HDLC Packet
over E1/T1/J1 interface,
PEUc/HDLC Packet over
E1/T1/J1 interface
TDM: POUc/TDM
channelized Optical STM-
1/OC-3 interface
GbIP: FG2a/GbIP GSM
BSC Gb IP interface
Abis_TDM:
EIUa/Abis_TDM and
EIUb/Abis_TDM E1/T1
circuit Interface for Abis,
OIUa/Abis_TDM and
OIUb/Abis_TDM
channelized Optical STM-1
Interface for Abis
Ater_TDM:
EIUa/Ater_TDM and
EIUb/Ater_TDM E1/T1
circuit Interface for Ater,
OIUa/Ater_TDM and
OIUb/Ater_TDM
channelized Optical STM-1
Interface for Ater
Pb_TDM: EIUa/Pb_TDM
and EIUb/Pb_TDM E1/T1
circuit Interface for Pb,
OIUa/Pb_TDM and
OIUb/Pb_TDM channelized
Optical STM-1 Interface for
Pb
A_TDM: EIUa/A_TDM and
EIUb/A_TDM E1/T1 circuit
Interface for A,
OIUa/A_TDM and

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

OIUb/A_TDM channelized
Optical STM-1 Interface for
A
Abis_IP: PEUa/Abis_IP IP
interface for Abis
SAU: Service Aware Unit.
The SAUa/SAUc board
filters and takes statistics of
the data reported by NEs and
reports the result to the
upper-level product.
NIU: Network Intelligence
Unit
NASP: Network Assistant
Service Processor
GUI Value Range: A_TDM,
Abis_IP, Abis_TDM,
Ater_TDM, ATM, FR, GbIP,
GCP, GPCU, GTC, HDLC,
IP, MCP, NASP, NIU, OAM,
Pb_TDM, RGCP, RUCP,
SAU, TDM_Switching,
TDM, UCP, UUP
Unit: None
Actual Value Range:
A_TDM, Abis_IP,
Abis_TDM, Ater_TDM,
ATM, FR, GbIP, GCP,
GPCU, GTC, HDLC, IP,
MCP, NASP, NIU, OAM,
Pb_TDM, RGCP, RUCP,
SAU, TDM_Switching,
TDM, UCP, UUP
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid if
one of the following
conditions is met:
1.BRDCLASS is set to
TNU,SAU,OMU.
2.BRDTYPE is set to
SPUb,NIUa,NIUc,DPUf,PO
Ua,POUc,DPUg,AEUa,DPU
e,DPUd,DPUc,DPUb,DPUa,
XPUb,DPUj,DPUh,GOUe,G
OUd,XPUa,EIUb,GOUa,GO
Uc,XPUc,AOUc,FG2c,FG2
a,AOUa,FG2d,OIUb,OIUa,

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

UOIc,SPUc,UOIa,SPUa,EI
Ua,PEUc,PEUa. This
parameter must be set when
BRDTYPE is set to
EIUa,DPUe,DPUb,SPUc,SP
Ub,FG2a,OIUa,SPUa,XPUc,
XPUb,XPUa,EIUb,UOIa,PE
Uc,OIUb,PEUa,POUc.The
default value of
"LGCAPPTYPE" is OAM
when "BRDCLASS" in MO
BRD is set to OMU, SAU
when "BRDCLASS" in MO
BRD is set to SAU and
TDM_Switching when
"BRDCLASS" in MO BRD
is set to TNU.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SN Slot No. Meaning: Number of the slot
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship: The
default value of "SN" is 4
when "BRDCLASS" in MO
BRD is set to TNU.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
RED Backup Meaning: Working mode of
a board. If this parameter is
set to YES, the board works
in active/standby mode. If
this parameter is set to NO,
the board works in
independent mode.
GUI Value Range:
YES(YES), NO(NO)
Unit: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Actual Value Range: YES,


NO
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: Yes
Impact on Network
Performance: None
ISTCBRD TC board Meaning: Whether it is a TC
board
GUI Value Range:
YES(YES), NO(NO)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: YES,
NO
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid if
one of the following
conditions is met:
1.BRDCLASS is set to
TNU. 2.LGCAPPTYPE is
set to GTC,GPCU,UUP.
3.BRDTYPE is set to
GOUe,NIUa,NIUc,POUa,P
OUc,DPUg,DPUf,DPUe,DP
Ud,DPUc,DPUa,EIUa,DPUj
,DPUh,AEUa,GOUd,EIUb,
AOUc,GOUc,GOUa,FG2c,F
G2a,AOUa,FG2d,OIUb,OIU
a,UOIc,UOIa,PEUc,PEUa.
This parameter must be set if
one of the following
conditions is met:
1.BRDCLASS is set to
TNU. 2.LGCAPPTYPE is
set to GTC. 3.BRDTYPE is
set to
DPUf,DPUc,OIUb,OIUa,EI
Ua,EIUb,POUc.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

MPUSUBRACK MPU Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack where the MPU
subsystem is located
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: Yes
Impact on Network
Performance: None
MPUSLOT MPU Slot No. Meaning: Number of the slot
where the MPU subsystem
is located
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: Yes
Impact on Network
Performance: None
ISSUPPORTFRA Support FRA Meaning: Whether the
AOUc board supports FRA
(E1/T1 frame relay interface
board). If this parameter is
set to YES, you can run the
ADD FRALNK command
to configure fractional links.
GUI Value Range: NO(NO),
YES(YES)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO,
YES
MML Default Value:
NO(NO)
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

This parameter is valid if


one of the following
conditions is met:
1.PORTWORKMODE is
set to BAK. 2.RED is set to
NO.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
PORTWORKMODE Port Work Mode Meaning: Work mode of the
board ports.
Load sharing:The ports of
the active board and the
standby board work
independently. Load sharing
mode is supported only
when the backplane version
of the subrack where the
board is located is VER.C or
later versions. To check the
backplane version, run the
DSP BRDVER command
and see the value of the
Backplane version
parameter.
Backup:The ports of the
standby board are used only
for backup.
GUI Value Range:
BAK(Backup), LS(Load
sharing)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: LS,
BAK
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only
when RED is set to YES.
This parameter must be set
when RED is set to YES.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
LGCUSAGETYPE Application type of Meaning: Logical function

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

POUc_TDM type of a POUc board when


it is used in TDM
transmission
GUI Value Range: A/Gb,
Abis/Ater/Pb/Gb
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: A/Gb,
Abis/Ater/Pb/Gb
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only
when LGCAPPTYPE is set
to TDM. This parameter
must be set when
LGCAPPTYPE is set to
TDM.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
AUTOADDSRCON Add inter-subrack path Meaning: Whether to add an
automatically inter-subrack TDM
connection path
automatically. If this
parameter is set to YES, an
inter-subrack TDM
connection path is added
automatically. If this
parameter is set to NO, users
must run the ADD
SRCONPATH command to
add an inter-subrack TDM
connection path.
GUI Value Range: NO(NO),
YES(YES)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO,
YES
MML Default Value:
YES(YES)
Recommended Value:
YES(YES)
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only
when BRDCLASS is set to
TNU.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Service Interrupted After


Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
1.To add a board (Subrack No. = 0; Board Class = XPU; Board Type = XPUa; Logic
function type = RGCP; Slot No. = 0), run the following command:
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=RGCP, SN=0;

2.To add a board (Subrack No. = 0; Board Class = XPU; Board Type = SPUa; Logic
function type = RUCP; Slot No. = 2), run the following command:
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=SPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=RUCP, SN=2;

3.To add a board (Subrack No. = 0; Board Class = DPU; Board Type = DPUb; Logic
function type = UUP; Slot No. = 10;
Is TC board = NO(NO); MPU Subrack No. = 0; MPU Slot No. = 2), run the following
command:
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=DPU, BRDTYPE=DPUb, LGCAPPTYPE=UUP, SN=10, ISTCBRD=NO,
MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=2;

5.2.1.13 Remove Board(RMV BRD)

Function
Use this command to remove a board. This command is used on all types of boards except
the SCUa, SCUb, GCUa, GCUb, GCGa and GCGb.

Note
1. The board is unavailable after the removal. You must use this command with caution.
2. The board where the MPU subsystem is configured can be removed only when the MPU
subsystem is not bound with other boards.
3. The MML command cannot be run to remove the SCUa, SCUb, GCGa, GCGb, GCUa and
GCUb boards that are configured in the system by default.
4. After a board is removed, the counter values for the board are unreliable in the last
measurement period.
5. Before deleting an SAU board, check whether the board to be deleted functions as the SAU
center. If yes, this board cannot be deleted. If you want to delete the board that functions as
the SAU center, run the SET SAUCENTER command to change the board to non-SAU
center, and then delete this board.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SN Slot No. Meaning: Number of the slot
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To remove the board in slot 10 of subrack 0 (Subrack No. = 0; Slot No. = 10), run
the following command:
RMV BRD: SRN=0, SN=10;

5.2.1.14 Display the Information of OMU(DSP OMU)

Function
Use this command to query the information about the OMU.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Note
1. In dual-server mode, the OMU consists of the active and standby nodes. You can use this
command to query the configurations and states of each node, data synchronization
information, and link states.
2. The virtual IP address is the one configured on the active OMU during the installation.
3. When the OMU is installed in single-server mode, the data synchronization status, the
status of the network ,and backup channel are unavailable.
4. The data synchronization status can only be queried only when the standby OMU server
works in stable state.
5. The process of the data synchronization between the active and standby OMUs consists of
two steps:
(1) The standby OMU server synchronizes the initial data of the active OMU server.
(2) The standby OMU server synchronizes the modification of the active OMU server in real
time.

Parameters
None

Example
To query the information about the OMU, run the following command:
DSP OMU:;

%%DSP OMU:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

OMU server state


----------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 25
Computer name = OMU_25
Internal network fixed IP = 172.16.3.50
External network fixed IP = 10.168.172.2
Backup network IP = 192.168.3.50
Debugging IP = 192.168.6.50
Operational state = Active normal
Version = XXXXXX

Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 27
Computer name = OMU_27
Internal network fixed IP = 172.16.3.60
External network fixed IP = 10.168.172.8
Backup network IP = 192.168.3.60
Debugging IP = 192.168.6.60
Operational state = Standby normal
Version = XXXXXX
(Number of results = 2)

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Other state
-----------
Internal network virtual IP = 172.16.3.40
Internal network virtual IP mask = 255.0.0.0
External network virtual IP = 10.168.172.5
External network virtual IP mask = 255.255.254.0
Internal network virtual IP state = Normal
External network virtual IP state = Normal
Data-sync state = Data synchronization is successful
Internal network link state = Normal
External network link state = Normal
Backup network link state = Normal
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of OMU


Slot No. Slot No. of OMU
Computer name Computer name
Internal network fixed IP IP address configured for the internal
Ethernet adapter team
External network fixed IP IP address configured for the external
Ethernet adapter team
Backup network IP IP address used for the communication
between the active OMU and the standby
OMU. This IP address is configured for the
backup Ethernet adapter.
Debugging IP IP address configured for the debugging
Ethernet adapter
Operational state Active normal, Standby normal, Normal,
Unstable, Fault.The operational state
"Unstable" is the temporary state during the
OMU startup or during an active and
standby switchover.The operational state
"Fault" is displayed only when an active
OMU fails to detect the status of the standby
OMU. Usually, the reason for the detection
failure is the interrupted communication
between the active and standby OMUs. You
can take measures provided in the alarm
handling suggestions specific to ALM-
20702 Active and Standby OMU
Communication Link Failure to restore
communication.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Domain Name Description

Version Version No of active work area.


Internal network virtual IP Local computer configured internal network
virtual IP address.
Internal network virtual IP mask Local computer configured internal network
virtual IP mask.
External network virtual IP Local computer configured external network
virtual IP address.
External network virtual IP mask Local computer configured external network
virtual IP mask.
Internal network virtual IP state Normal, Lost.The state "lost" indicates that
an internal virtual IP address does not exist
on the related internal network adapter.
External network virtual IP state Normal, Lost.The state "lost" indicates that
an external virtual IP address does not exist
on the related external network adapter.
Data-sync state Prepare data synchronization;Active server
is backing up the data in database;Standby
server is getting the backup file;Standby
server is restoring data from the backup
file;Data synchronization is stopped;Data
synchronization is successful;Data
synchronization not built due to version
inconsistency;Data synchronization can not
built due to OMU failure switchover;Data
synchronization fault;Standby server not in
stable state, query failed;Data
synchronization is initial.
Internal network link state Normal, Breakdown.
External network link state Normal, Breakdown.
Backup network link state Normal, Breakdown.

If network connections break down, ALM-20702 Active and Standby OMU Communication
Link Failure is generated. Then, you must clear the alarm by referring to the related alarm
handling suggestions.

5.2.1.15 Set SAU FTP Client Security Policy(SET SAUFTPSCLT)

Function
Use this command to set the security policy of the SAU FTP client.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Note
1. When the encryption mode for transmission is set to AUTO, the FTP client first tries to
connect the FTP server with the encrypted mode. If the connection fails, the plain text mode is
selected.
2. If the state firewall is selected, the FTP client sends the CCC command to the firewall to
switch the transmission mode to the plain text.
3. If the SSL certificate authentication is selected, certificates for the NE should be configured
on the U2000 at first.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
ENCRYMODE The Encrypted Mode Meaning: Transport
encryption mode supported
when the NE serves as the
FTP client.
AUTO(Auto): indicates that
the FTP server selects the

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

encryption mode.
PLAINTEXT(Plain Text):
indicates that the plaintext
mode must be used.
ENCRYPTED(SSL
Encrypted): indicates that
the encrypted mode must be
used.
GUI Value Range:
AUTO(Auto),
PLAINTEXT(Plain Text),
ENCRYPTED(SSL
Encrypted)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: AUTO,
PLAINTEXT,
ENCRYPTED
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value:
AUTO(Auto)
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SPTSTATEFWL Support State Firewall Meaning: Whether the FTP
client supports the state
firewall.
GUI Value Range: NO(Not
Support), YES(Support)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO,
YES
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value:
YES(Support)
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SSLCERTAUTH Support SSL Certificate Meaning: Whether the FTP


Authentication client supports
authenticating the FTP
server.
GUI Value Range: NO(No),
YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: YES,
NO
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value:
NO(No)
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only
when ENCRYMODE is set
to AUTO,ENCRYPTED.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
TRANSMODE FTP Mode Meaning: Choose which
transfer mode for ftp client.
GUI Value Range:
Auto(Auto Mode),
Passive(Passive Mode),
Port(Port Mode)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: Auto,
Passive, , Port,
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value:
Auto(Auto Mode)
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No
Impact on Network
Performance: None
STARTPORT Start Data Port Meaning: Start data port
number on the FTP client.
GUI Value Range:
1024~65535
Unit: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Actual Value Range:


1024~65535
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship: 1.
The start data port must be
smaller than the end data
port. 2. The range between
the start data port and the
end data port must not be
less than 5000.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
ENDPORT End Data Port Meaning: End data port
number on the FTP client.
GUI Value Range:
1024~65535
Unit: None
Actual Value Range:
1024~65535
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship: 1.
The end data port must be
bigger than the start data
port. 2. The range between
the start data port and the
end data port must not be
less than 5000.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A

Example
1. To set the security policy of the FTP client (The Encrypted Mode = PLAINTEXT;
Support State Firewall = YES), run the following command:
SET SAUFTPSCLT: ENCRYMODE=PLAINTEXT, SPTSTATEFWL=YES;
2. To set the security policy of the FTP client (The Encrypted Mode = ENCRYPTED;

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

SSLCERTAUTH = YES), run the following command:


SET SAUFTPSCLT: ENCRYMODE=ENCRYPTED, SSLCERTAUTH=YES;

5.2.1.16 List SAU FTP Client Security Policy(LST SAUFTPSCLT)

Function
Use this command to query the security policy of the SAU FTP client.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Example
%%LST SAUFTPSCLT:SRN=0,SN=23;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

FTPS Client Parameter and Policy List


-------------------------------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Transport Encrypted Mode = Plaintext
Support State Firewall = yes
Support SSL Certificate Authentication = no
FTP Mode = Passive
the Source data port lower limit = 25001
the Source data port upper limit = 30000

(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of SAU.


Slot No. Slot No. of SAU.
Transport Encrypted Mode Transport encryption mode supported when
the NE serves as the FTP client. Value
Range: AutoPlaintext, Encrypted.
Support State Firewall Whether the FTP client supports the state
firewall. Value Rangee: Yes, No.
Support SSL Certificate Authentication Whether the FTP client supports
authenticating the FTP server. Value
Rangee: Yes, No.
FTP Mode Choose which transfer mode for ftp client.
Value Rangee: Auto, Passive, Port.
the Source data port lower limit On Port Mode, the start data port number on
the FTP client.
the Source data port upper limit On Port Mode, the end data port number on
the FTP client.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

5.2.1.17 List RNC-Oriented Event CHR Process Switch on An


Application(LST UMMEVENTCHRCTRL)

Function
Use this command to query the setting of the event CHR(Call History Record) process switch
on an application for an RNC.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

AppType Application Type Meaning: Type of an


application that uses CHRs.
GUI Value Range:
EBC(Event Based Counter),
ECO(eCoordinator),
NASTAR(Nastar),
EMS(EMS)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: EBC,
ECO, NASTAR, EMS
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
NONE
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: NONE
LstFormat LstFormat Meaning: When this switch
is set to on, the RNC
performs user data
consistency check after each
procedure. When this switch
is set to off, the RNC does
not perform user data
consistency check after each
procedure.
GUI Value Range:
HORIZONTAL,
VERTICAL
Unit: None
Actual Value Range:
HORIZONTAL,

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

VERTICAL
MML Default Value:
VERTICAL
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To query the setting of the event CHR process switch on the EBC for an RNC, run
the following command:
LST UMMEVENTCHRCTRL: AppType=EBC;
%%LST UMMEVENTCHRCTRL: AppType=EBC;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

List RNC-Oriented Event CHR Process Switch on An Application


------------------------------------------------------------
Application Type = Event Based Counter
Event CHR Process Switch = OUTPUT_TO_SAU_SWITCH::OFF
CHR Event Block Switch = CONN_SETUP::ON
= RRC_RELEASE::ON
...
...
...
CHR Event Block Switch 2 = COMPRESS_MODE_INFO::OFF
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

5.2.2 SAU MML Commands (BSC6910)


This section describes the MML commands related to the SAU in the BSC6910.

5.2.2.1 Display the Information of SAU(DSP SAU)

Function
Use this command to query the information about the SAU. The information includes the
running state of the SAU, fixed IP addresses, and version.

Note
None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To query the information about the SAU, run the following command:
DSP SAU:;

%%DSP SAU:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

SAU server state


----------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Ftp Center = Yes
Computer name = dopra_linux
Internal network fixed IP = 172.16.3.240

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

External network fixed IP = 10.145.22.213


Operational state = Normal
Version = SAU V600R011C00SPC100
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of SAU.


Slot No. Slot No. of SAU.
Ftp Center Whether the SAU functions as the FTP
center.
Computer name Computer name.
Internal network fixed IP Internal network fixed IP.
External network fixed IP External network fixed IP.
Operational state Normal, Fault.
Version Version No of active work area.

5.2.2.2 Display SAU Work Area Information(DSP SAUAREA)

Function
Use this command to query the version information of the SAU area.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Service Interrupted After


Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To switch over the working area of the SAU, run the following command:
DSP SAUAREA:;

%%DSP SAUAREA:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

SAU workarea status


-------------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Workarea flag = version_a
Mainarea version = SAU V600R011C00SPC100
Standbyarea version = <NULL>
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of SAU.


Slot No. Slot No. of SAU.
Workarea flag Directory where the active SAU workspace

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Domain Name Description

is installed.
Mainarea version Version of the software installed on the
active SAU workspace.
Standbyarea version Version of the software installed on the
standby SAU workspace.

5.2.2.3 Display Modules State on SAU(DSP SAUMODULE)

Function
Use this command to query the running state of modules on the SAU.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Service Interrupted After


Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To query the state of the SAU, run the following command:
DSP SAUMODULE:;

%%DSP SAUMODULE:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

State of SAU modules in slot 23 of subrack 0


--------------------------------------------
Service name State Startup type

host_gate Started Automatic


ftp_server Started Automatic
sntp Started Automatic
sau_manager Started Automatic
data_server Started Automatic
alarm Started Automatic
debug_log Started Automatic
(Number of results = 7)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Service name Module Name.


State SAU Module State: Started, Stopped,
Exception.
Startup type Startup Type: Automatic, Disabled.

5.2.2.4 Display SAU Server State(DSP SAUSRV)

Function
Use this command to query the state of the SAU Server.

Note
None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To query the state of the SAU server, run the following command:
DSP SAUSRV:;

%%DSP SAUSRV:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

State of the SAU in slot 23 of subrack 0 (CPU&MEM)


--------------------------------------------------
CPU(%) = 1%
MEM(%) = 1%
IO(%) = 0%
Logical CPU = 16
Memory capacity(MB) = 31776

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

(Number of results = 1)

State of the SAU in slot 23 of subrack 0 (Logical harddisk)


-----------------------------------------------------------
Logical harddisk = /dev/sda1
Total space(M) = 5041
Free space(M) = 4710
Free space(%) = 93%

Logical harddisk = /dev/sda6


Total space(M) = 5041
Free space(M) = 4894
Free space(%) = 97%

Logical harddisk = /dev/sda3


Total space(M) = 5041
Free space(M) = 4847
Free space(%) = 96%

Logical harddisk = /dev/sda8


Total space(M) = 520946
Free space(M) = 518264
Free space(%) = 99%

Logical harddisk = /dev/sda5


Total space(M) = 5041
Free space(M) = 4903
Free space(%) = 97%

Logical harddisk = /dev/sda7


Total space(M) = 5041
Free space(M) = 4855
Free space(%) = 96%
(Number of results = 6)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

CPU(%) CPU usage.


MEM(%) Memory usage.
IO(%) IO usage.
Logical CPU Number of the logical CPU.
Memory capacity(MB) Capacity of the physical memory.
Logical harddisk Name of the logical hard disk driver.
Total space(M) Space of the logical hard disk.
Free space(M) Available space of the logical hard disk.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Domain Name Description

Free space(%) Percent of the available space of the logical


hard disk.

5.2.2.5 Display SAU Business Instance(DSP SAUINSTANCE)

Function
This command is used to query the SAU business instance at SAU board.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Example
To query the SAU business instance at SAU board, run the following command:
DSP SAUINSTANCE:;

The result is as follows:


%%DSP SAUINSTANCE:SRN=0,SN=23;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

SAU business instance infomation


----------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
NASTAR Instance version = SAUV600R002C00SPC020
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of SAU.


Slot No. Slot No. of SAU.
EBC Instance version The version of EBC Instance in this board.
EMS Instance version The version of EMS Instance in this board.

5.2.2.6 Display SAU Certificate Synchronization Status(DSP


SAUCERTFILE)

Function
Use this command to query the certificate synchronization status of the SAU.

Note
Only the system administrator can run this command.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning:


GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

MML Default Value: None


Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SN Slot No. Meaning:
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
Use this command to query the certificate synchronization status of the SAU:
DSP SAUCERTFILE: SRN=0, SN=23;

%%DSP SAUCERTFILE: SRN=0, SN=23;%%


RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

Query The Certificate Synchronization Status Of The SAU


-------------------------------------------------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Status Of Certificate Synchronization = Consistent
Device Certificate = usercert.pem
CA Certificate List = rootca.pem, cacrt.pem
CRL File List = certcrl.crl, huaweicrl.crl
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Number of the subrack that houses the SAU.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Domain Name Description

Slot No. Number of the slot where the SAU is


located.
Status Of Certificate Synchronization Status Of Certificate Synchronization,if the
certificates on the SAU is inconsistent with
those on the OMU, the SAU immediately
synchronizes the certificates from the OMU.
Device Certificate The device certificates to be synchronized.
CA Certificate List List of the CA certificates to be
synchronized.
CRL File List List of the CRL File to be synchronized.

5.2.2.7 Reset SAU Service(RST SAU)

Function
Use this command to reset the software or hardware of the SAU.

Note
1. If the reset type is SOFT, the SAU software is reset. If the reset type is HARD, the SAU
hardware is reset.
2. When multiple SAUs are configured, all the SAUs will be reset if the subrack number and
slot number are not specified.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

TP Reset Type Meaning: After the software


is reset, the PC is not
restarted.
GUI Value Range:
SOFT(Soft Reset),
HARD(Hard Reset)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: SOFT,
HARD
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the
subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
1. To reset the hardware of the SAU( (Subrack No. = 0, Slot No. = 23)), run the
following command:
RST SAU: TP=HARD, SRN=0, SN=23;

%%RST SAU: TP=HARD, SRN=0, SN=23;%%


RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

Running result
--------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

State = Success
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

2. To reset the software of the SAU( (Subrack No. = 0, Slot No. = 23)), run the
following command:
RST SAU: TP=SOFT, SRN=0, SN=23;

%%RST SAU: TP=SOFT, SRN=0, SN=23;%%


RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

Running result
--------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
State = Success
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

5.2.2.8 Swap SAU Work Area(SWP SAUAREA)

Function
Use this command to switch over the working area of the SAU.

Note
1. Switching the working area of the SAU changes the version and data of the SAU and
disrupts the services on the SAU.
2. To keep normal SAU switchover, you should ensure that the standby working area of the
SAU is normally installed.
3. Before running this command, you should ensure that no other operations are performed on
the SAU.
4. When multiple SAUs are configured, the work areas of all the SAUs will be switched over
if the subrack number and slot number are not specified.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Recommended Value: None


Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
1. To switch over the working area of the SAU (Subrack No. = 0, Slot No. = 23),
run the following command:
SWP SAUAREA: SRN=0, SN=23;

%%SWP SAUAREA: SRN=0, SN=23;%%


RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

Running result
--------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
State = Success
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

5.2.2.9 Set SAU FTP Center(SET SAUCENTER)

Function
This command is used to specify whether to set the SAU board in a specified slot to the FTP
center.

Note
1. When setting an SAU as the FTP center, the state of the SAU must be normal. Otherwise,
command execution on the SAU will fail.
2. Data reception on the SAU may temporarily fail during a switch of the SAU FTP center.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

FTPCENTER Ftp Center Switch Meaning: This parameter is


used to specify whether to
set the SAU board in
specified slot to the FTP
center.
GUI Value Range: OFF(the
SAU board is not set to the
FTP center), ON(the SAU
board is set to the FTP
center)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: ON,
OFF
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the
subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only
when FTPCENTER is set

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

to ON. This parameter must


be set when FTPCENTER
is set to ON.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only
when FTPCENTER is set
to ON. This parameter must
be set when FTPCENTER
is set to ON.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To set an SAU as the FTP center (Subrack N0. = 1, Slot No. = 23), run the
following command:
SET SAUCENTER: FTPCENTER=ON, SRN=0, SN=23;

5.2.2.10 List SAU FTP Center(LST SAUCENTER)

Function
Use this command to query the subrack and slot information about the SAU that functions as
the FTP center.

Note
None

Parameters
None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Example
To query the subrack and slot information about the SAU that functions as the FTP
center, run the following command:
LST SAUCENTER:;

%%LST SAUCENTER:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

Center of SAU
-------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of SAU.


Slot No. Slot No. of SAU.

5.2.2.11 List SAU SSL Configuration(LST SAUSSLCONF)

Function
Use this command to query the SSL configuration of the SAU.

Note
Only the system administrator can run this command.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning:


GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Impact on Network
Performance: None
SN Slot No. Meaning:
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To query the SAU SSL configuration, run the following command:
LST SAUSSLCONF:SRN=0, SN=23;

%%LST SAUSSLCONF:SRN=0, SN=23;%%


RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

List SAU SSL Configuration


-----------------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Connection Type = ALL Type
Authentication Mode = Verify None
Renegotiation Switch = Enable
Renegotiation Interval = 60
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Number of the subrack that houses the SAU.


Slot No. Number of the slot where the SAU is
located.
Connection Type See the parameter description of the SET
CONNTYPE command.
Authentication Mode See the parameter description of the SET

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Domain Name Description

SSLAUTHMODE command.
Renegotiation Switch See the parameter description of the SET
SSLCONF command.
Renegotiation Interval See the parameter description of the SET
SSLCONF command.

5.2.2.12 Add Board(ADD BRD)

Function
Use this command to add a board. This command can be used by all types of boards except
the SCUb, GCUa, GCGa, GCUb, GCGb, EGPUa(RMP) and EXPUa(RMP).

Note
1. You are advised to configure the boards in the following sequence: GPU, INT, NIU, DPU,
OMU, SAU.
2. After a subrack is added, the SCUb boards are automatically configured in slots 20 and 21.
In the MPS, the EGPUa boards are automatically configured in slots 8 and 9 and the GCUa
boards are automatically configured in slots 14 and 15. These automatically configured boards
cannot be removed.
3. When adding the boards that are in active/standby mode, set SN to an even number. The
active and standby boards can be added at the same time by running this command once.
4. For GPU boards:
1) A maximum of 128 GPU boards can be configured in a base station controller. A maximum
of 64 GPU boards whose logical function type is GCUP, GMCP, NASP or UMSP can be
configured.
2) If the subrack is a Main Processing Subrack (MPS), the GPU board can be configured only
in slots 0-7, 10-13, 16-19, and 22-27. If the subrack is not an MPS, the GPU board can be
configured only in slots 0-19 and 22-27.
5. For INT boards:
1) If the subrack is a Main Processing Subrack (MPS), the INT board can be configured only
in slots 16-19 and 22-27. If the subrack is not an MPS, the INT board can be configured only
in slots 14-19 and 22-27.
2) EXOUa boards can only be configured in slots 16-19 and 22-25.
3) A maximum of 12 INT boards can be configured in a subrack.
6. For OMU boards:
1) OMU boards can only be configured in the MPS.
2) An EOMUa occupies two slots.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

3) If the BSC6910 works in single-OMU mode and an EOMUa board is configured, the
EOMUa board can be configured in slot 0, 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 25, or 27.
4) If the BSC6910 works in dual-OMU mode and two EOMUa boards are configured, the
EOMUa boards can be configured in slots 0 and 2, 4 and 6, 10 and 12, or 25 and 27.
7. For SAU boards:
1) An ESAUa board occupies two slots.
2) If an ESAUa board is added by running this command, a soft reset of this ESAUa board
must be implemented by running the RST SAU command.
3) If the subrack is a Main Processing Subrack (MPS), the ESAUa board can be configured
only in slots 0-7, 10-13, 16-19, and 22-27. If the subrack is not an MPS, the ESAUa board can
be configured only in slots 0-19 and 22-27.
8. For NIU boards:
1) If the subrack is a Main Processing Subrack (MPS), the NIU board can be configured only
in slots 0-7, 10-13, 16-19, and 22-27. If the subrack is not an MPS, the NIU board can be
configured only in slots 0-19 and 22-27.
9. For DPU boards:
1) If the subrack is a Main Processing Subrack (MPS), the NIU board can be configured only
in slots 0-7, 10-13, 16-19, and 22-27. If the subrack is not an MPS, the NIU board can be
configured only in slots 0-19 and 22-27.
2) Before adding the DPU board, ensure that a GPU board with the logical function of GCUP
has been configured.
10. After a board is started, the counter value for the board is unreliable in the first
measurement period.
11. When an AOUc/FG2c/GOUc/GOUe/EXOUa/FG2d/GOUd board is added to a BSC, the
physical ports for the boards are automatically configured. The total number of ATM logical
ports, IP logical ports, and physical ports configured for a BSC must not exceed 15000.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Impact on Network
Performance: None
BRDCLASS Board Class Meaning: Classes of boards
classified according to
function modules
GUI Value Range: INT,
DPU, GPU, OMU, SAU,
NIU
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: INT,
DPU, GPU, OMU, SAU,
NIU
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
BRDTYPE Board Type Meaning: Type of the board
GUI Value Range: AOUc,
DPUf, EGPUa, ENIUa,
EOMUa, ESAUa, EXOUa,
EXPUa, FG2c, FG2d,
GOUc, GOUd, GOUe,
POUc, UOIc
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: AOUc,
DPUf, EGPUa, ENIUa,
EOMUa, ESAUa, EXOUa,
EXPUa, FG2c, FG2d,
GOUc, GOUd, GOUe,
POUc, UOIc
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: Yes
Impact on Network
Performance: None
LGCAPPTYPE Logical function type Meaning: Logical function

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

type of the board


GTC: GSM BSC TC
Process
ATM: ATM over
Unchannelized Optical
STM-1/OC-3 interface
IP: IP over channelized
Optical STM-1/OC-3
interface
TDM: TDM over
channelized Optical STM-
1/OC-3 interface
UCUP: UMTS RNC
control-plane and user-plane
processing
GCUP: GSM BSC control-
plane and user-plane
processing
NASP: Network Assistant
Service Processor
GMCP: GSM BSC
Mathematics Calculation
Processing
UMSP: Unified Multi-RAT
Service Processing
GUI Value Range: ATM,
GCUP, GMCP, GTC, IP,
NASP, TDM, UCUP, UMSP
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: ATM,
GCUP, GMCP, GTC, IP,
NASP, TDM, UCUP, UMSP
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SN Slot No. Meaning: Number of the slot
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Recommended Value: None


Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
RED Backup Meaning: Working mode of
a board. If this parameter is
set to YES, the board works
in active/standby mode. If
this parameter is set to NO,
the board works in
independent mode.
GUI Value Range:
YES(YES), NO(NO)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: YES,
NO
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
ISSUPPORTFRA Support FRA Meaning: Whether the
AOUc board supports FRA
(E1/T1 frame relay interface
board). If this parameter is
set to YES, you can run the
ADD FRALNK command
to configure fractional links.
GUI Value Range: NO(NO),
YES(YES)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO,
YES
MML Default Value:
NO(NO)
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

when BRDTYPE is set to


AOUc.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
LGCUSAGETYPE Application type Meaning: Logical function
type of a POUc board when
it is used in TDM
transmission
GUI Value Range: A, Abis
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: A, Abis
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To add a GPU board with the board type of EGPUa and logical type of UCUP in slot 0
of subrack 0, run the following command:
ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=GPU, BRDTYPE=EGPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=UCUP, SN=0;

5.2.2.13 Remove Board(RMV BRD)

Function
Use this command to remove a board. This command is used on all types of boards except
the SCUb, GCUa, GCGa, GCUb, GCGb, EGPUa(RMP) and EXPUa(RMP).

Note
1. The board is unavailable after the removal. You must use this command with caution.
2. After a GPU board is removed by running this command, the BSC6910 automatically
adjusts backup resources and enters the internal configuration state. In this case, follow-up
executions of this command can succeed only after the BSC6910 leaves the internal
configuration state.
3. After a board is removed, the counter values for the board are unreliable in the last
measurement period.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

4. Before deleting an SAU board, check whether the board to be deleted functions as the SAU
center. If yes, this board cannot be deleted. If you want to delete the board that functions as
the SAU center, run the SET SAUCENTER command to change the board to non-SAU
center, and then delete this board.
5. Disable the BTS local switch before removing a GPU board. Replan the region for the BTS
local switch after the BTS whose GPU board is removed is relocated.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SN Slot No. Meaning: Number of the slot
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
To remove the board in slot 10 of subrack 0 (Subrack No. = 0; Slot No. = 10), run
the following command:
RMV BRD: SRN=0, SN=10;

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

5.2.2.14 Display the Information of OMU(DSP OMU)

Function
Use this command to query the information about the OMU.

Note
1. In dual-server mode, the OMU consists of the active and standby nodes. You can use this
command to query the configurations and states of each node, data synchronization
information, and link states.
2. The virtual IP address is the one configured on the active OMU during the installation.
3. When the OMU is installed in single-server mode, the data synchronization status, the
status of the network ,and backup channel are unavailable.
4. The data synchronization status can only be queried only when the standby OMU server
works in stable state.
5. The process of the data synchronization between the active and standby OMUs consists of
two steps:
(1) The standby OMU server synchronizes the initial data of the active OMU server.
(2) The standby OMU server synchronizes the modification of the active OMU server in real
time.

Parameters
None

Example
To query the information about the OMU, run the following command:
DSP OMU:;

%%DSP OMU:;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

OMU server state


----------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 25
Computer name = OMU_25
Internal network fixed IP = 172.16.3.50
External network fixed IP = 10.168.172.2
Backup network IP = 192.168.3.50
Debugging IP = 192.168.6.50
Operational state = Active normal
Version = XXXXXX

Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 27
Computer name = OMU_27
Internal network fixed IP = 172.16.3.60

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

External network fixed IP = 10.168.172.8


Backup network IP = 192.168.3.60
Debugging IP = 192.168.6.60
Operational state = Standby normal
Version = XXXXXX
(Number of results = 2)

Other state
-----------
Internal network virtual IP = 172.16.3.40
Internal network virtual IP mask = 255.0.0.0
External network virtual IP = 10.168.172.5
External network virtual IP mask = 255.255.254.0
Internal network virtual IP state = Normal
External network virtual IP state = Normal
Data-sync state = Data synchronization is successful
Internal network link state = Normal
External network link state = Normal
Backup network link state = Normal
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of OMU


Slot No. Slot No. of OMU
Computer name Computer name
Internal network fixed IP IP address configured for the internal
Ethernet adapter team
External network fixed IP IP address configured for the external
Ethernet adapter team
Backup network IP IP address used for the communication
between the active OMU and the standby
OMU. This IP address is configured for the
backup Ethernet adapter.
Debugging IP IP address configured for the debugging
Ethernet adapter
Operational state Active normal, Standby normal, Normal,
Unstable, Fault.The operational state
"Unstable" is the temporary state during the
OMU startup or during an active and
standby switchover.The operational state
"Fault" is displayed only when an active
OMU fails to detect the status of the standby
OMU. Usually, the reason for the detection
failure is the interrupted communication

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Domain Name Description

between the active and standby OMUs. You


can take measures provided in the alarm
handling suggestions specific to ALM-
20702 Active and Standby OMU
Communication Link Failure to restore
communication.
Version Version No of active work area.
Internal network virtual IP Local computer configured internal network
virtual IP address.
Internal network virtual IP mask Local computer configured internal network
virtual IP mask.
External network virtual IP Local computer configured external network
virtual IP address.
External network virtual IP mask Local computer configured external network
virtual IP mask.
Internal network virtual IP state Normal, Lost.The state "lost" indicates that
an internal virtual IP address does not exist
on the related internal network adapter.
External network virtual IP state Normal, Lost.The state "lost" indicates that
an external virtual IP address does not exist
on the related external network adapter.
Data-sync state Prepare data synchronization;Active server
is backing up the data in database;Standby
server is getting the backup file;Standby
server is restoring data from the backup
file;Data synchronization is stopped;Data
synchronization is successful;Data
synchronization not built due to version
inconsistency;Data synchronization can not
built due to OMU failure switchover;Data
synchronization fault;Standby server not in
stable state, query failed;Data
synchronization is initial.
Internal network link state Normal, Breakdown.
External network link state Normal, Breakdown.
Backup network link state Normal, Breakdown.

If network connections break down, ALM-20702 Active and Standby OMU Communication
Link Failure is generated. Then, you must clear the alarm by referring to the related alarm
handling suggestions.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

5.2.2.15 Set SAU FTP Client Security Policy(SET SAUFTPSCLT)

Function
Use this command to set the security policy of the SAU FTP client.

Note
1. When the encryption mode for transmission is set to AUTO, the FTP client first tries to
connect the FTP server with the encrypted mode. If the connection fails, the plain text mode is
selected.
2. If the state firewall is selected, the FTP client sends the CCC command to the firewall to
switch the transmission mode to the plain text.
3. If the SSL certificate authentication is selected, certificates for the NE should be configured
on the U2000 at first.

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Performance: None
ENCRYMODE The Encrypted Mode Meaning: Transport
encryption mode supported
when the NE serves as the
FTP client.
AUTO(Auto): indicates that
the FTP server selects the
encryption mode.
PLAINTEXT(Plain Text):
indicates that the plaintext
mode must be used.
ENCRYPTED(SSL
Encrypted): indicates that
the encrypted mode must be
used.
GUI Value Range:
AUTO(Auto),
PLAINTEXT(Plain Text),
ENCRYPTED(SSL
Encrypted)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: AUTO,
PLAINTEXT,
ENCRYPTED
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value:
AUTO(Auto)
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SPTSTATEFWL Support State Firewall Meaning: Whether the FTP
client supports the state
firewall.
GUI Value Range: NO(Not
Support), YES(Support)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: NO,
YES
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value:
YES(Support)
Parameter Relationship:

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
SSLCERTAUTH Support SSL Certificate Meaning: Whether the FTP
Authentication client supports
authenticating the FTP
server.
GUI Value Range: NO(No),
YES(Yes)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: YES,
NO
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value:
NO(No)
Parameter Relationship:
This parameter is valid only
when ENCRYMODE is set
to AUTO,ENCRYPTED.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: None
TRANSMODE FTP Mode Meaning: Choose which
transfer mode for ftp client.
GUI Value Range:
Auto(Auto Mode),
Passive(Passive Mode),
Port(Port Mode)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: Auto,
Passive, , Port,
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value:
Auto(Auto Mode)
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Impact on Network
Performance: None
STARTPORT Start Data Port Meaning: Start data port
number on the FTP client.
GUI Value Range:
1024~65535
Unit: None
Actual Value Range:
1024~65535
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship: 1.
The start data port must be
smaller than the end data
port. 2. The range between
the start data port and the
end data port must not be
less than 5000.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
ENDPORT End Data Port Meaning: End data port
number on the FTP client.
GUI Value Range:
1024~65535
Unit: None
Actual Value Range:
1024~65535
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship: 1.
The end data port must be
bigger than the start data
port. 2. The range between
the start data port and the
end data port must not be
less than 5000.
Service Interrupted After
Modification: No (And no
impact on the UE in idle
mode)
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Example
1. To set the security policy of the FTP client (The Encrypted Mode = PLAINTEXT;
Support State Firewall = YES), run the following command:
SET SAUFTPSCLT: ENCRYMODE=PLAINTEXT, SPTSTATEFWL=YES;
2. To set the security policy of the FTP client (The Encrypted Mode = ENCRYPTED;
SSLCERTAUTH = YES), run the following command:
SET SAUFTPSCLT: ENCRYMODE=ENCRYPTED, SSLCERTAUTH=YES;

5.2.2.16 List SAU FTP Client Security Policy(LST SAUFTPSCLT)

Function
Use this command to query the security policy of the SAU FTP client.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

SRN Subrack No. Meaning: Number of the


subrack.
GUI Value Range: 0~11
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~11
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: N/A
SN Slot No. Meaning: Indicates the slot
number for running this
command.
GUI Value Range: 0~27
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~27
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None

Example
%%LST SAUFTPSCLT:SRN=0,SN=23;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

FTPS Client Parameter and Policy List


-------------------------------------
Subrack No. = 0
Slot No. = 23
Transport Encrypted Mode = Plaintext
Support State Firewall = yes
Support SSL Certificate Authentication = no
FTP Mode = Passive
the Source data port lower limit = 25001
the Source data port upper limit = 30000

(Number of results = 1)

--- END

Output Description
Domain Name Description

Subrack No. Subrack No. of SAU.


Slot No. Slot No. of SAU.
Transport Encrypted Mode Transport encryption mode supported when
the NE serves as the FTP client. Value
Range: AutoPlaintext, Encrypted.
Support State Firewall Whether the FTP client supports the state
firewall. Value Rangee: Yes, No.
Support SSL Certificate Authentication Whether the FTP client supports
authenticating the FTP server. Value
Rangee: Yes, No.
FTP Mode Choose which transfer mode for ftp client.
Value Rangee: Auto, Passive, Port.
the Source data port lower limit On Port Mode, the start data port number on
the FTP client.
the Source data port upper limit On Port Mode, the end data port number on
the FTP client.

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

5.2.2.17 List RNC-Oriented Event CHR Process Switch on An


Application(LST UMMEVENTCHRCTRL)

Function
Use this command to query the setting of the event CHR(Call History Record) process switch
on an application for an RNC.

Note
None

Parameters
Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

LogicRncId Logical RNC ID Meaning: Uniquely


identifies a logical RNC. A
logical RNC ID consists of
12-digit binary codes, and its
value ranges from 0 to 4095.
The RNC is a logical node
in the radio network
subsystem (RNS) and
controls the usage and
allocation of radio resources.
If "Load Sharing Type" is set
to "OVERFLOW" or
"Redundancy Type" is set to
"BACKUP" in the LST
URNCBASIC command
during data configuration,
this parameter must be input
manually. If "Load Sharing
Type" and "Redundancy
Type" are set to "MASTER"
in the LST URNCBASIC
command during data
configuration, the system
automatically uses the value
of the "RNC ID" without
input manually.
GUI Value Range: 0~4095
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: 0~4095
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: None
AppType Application Type Meaning: Type of an
application that uses CHRs.
GUI Value Range:
EBC(Event Based Counter),
ECO(eCoordinator),
NASTAR(Nastar),
EMS(EMS)
Unit: None
Actual Value Range: EBC,
ECO, NASTAR, EMS
MML Default Value: None
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
NONE
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network
Performance: NONE
LstFormat LstFormat Meaning: When this switch
is set to on, the RNC
performs user data
consistency check after each
procedure. When this switch
is set to off, the RNC does
not perform user data
consistency check after each
procedure.
GUI Value Range:
HORIZONTAL,
VERTICAL
Unit: None
Actual Value Range:
HORIZONTAL,
VERTICAL
MML Default Value:
VERTICAL
Recommended Value: None
Parameter Relationship:
None
Service Interrupted After
Modification: N/A
Impact on Network

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Parameter ID Parameter Name Parameter Description

Performance: None

Example
To query the setting of the event CHR process switch on the EBC for an RNC, run
the following command:
LST UMMEVENTCHRCTRL: AppType=EBC;
%%LST UMMEVENTCHRCTRL: LogicRncId=3333, AppType=EBC;%%
RETCODE = 0 Execution succeeded.

List RNC-Oriented Event CHR Process Switch on An Application


------------------------------------------------------------
Logical RNC ID = 3333
Application Type = Event Based Counter
Event CHR Process Switch = OUTPUT_TO_SAU_SWITCH::OFF
CHR Event Block Switch = CONN_SETUP::ON
= RRC_RELEASE::ON
...
...
...
CHR Event Block Switch 2 = COMPRESS_MODE_INFO::OFF
(Number of results = 1)

--- END

5.3 SAU Commands


This chapter provides the common commands related to SAU services required for SAU
software operation.

5.3.1 EBC Service Component Commands


This section describes the functions and usages of common commands related to the EBC
service component on an SAU board. Commands for maintaining the EBC service component
are stored in the opt/ebcsau directory.

5.3.1.1 svc_profile.sh
This section describes the function, directory, and running method of the svc_profile.sh script
of EBC service. Before running commands on the SAU, you must run the svc_profile.sh
script to set the user operating environment.

Script Format
. ./svc_profile.sh

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Function
Before running commands on the SAU, you can run the svc_profile.sh script to set the user
operating environment such as the command search path.

Saving Path
This script is saved in the /opt/ebcsau directory.

Authorized Users
User root is authorized to run this script.

Example
Log in to the SAU as an authorized user and run the environment variable script.
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh

5.3.1.2 sau4ebc_start
This section describes the command for starting SAU processes.

Command Syntax
sau4ebc_start

Function
1. Application scenario
This command is used for routine maintenance and troubleshooting.
2. Example
This command is used to start SAU processes, including the SAU service processing
processes and board management processes.

Authorized User
This command is executed by user root.

Prerequisites
Before you run this command, ensure that:
 The operating system is running properly.
 You have set environment variables by running the svc_profile.sh script on the Dopra
Linux operating system.

Application Example
# cd /opt/ebcsau

# . ./svc_profile.sh

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

# sau4ebc_start
Start SAU processes.

5.3.1.3 sau4ebc_stop
This section describes the command for stopping SAU service processes.

Command Syntax
sau4ebc_stop

Function
1. Application scenario
This command is used for routine maintenance and troubleshooting.
2. Example
This command is used to stop all SAU service processes.

Authorized User
This command is executed by user root.

Prerequisites
Before you run this command, ensure that:
 The operating system is running properly.
 You have set environment variables by running the svc_profile.sh script on the Dopra
Linux operating system.

Application Example
# cd /opt/ebcsau
# . ./svc_profile.sh

# sau4ebc_stop
Stop all SAU service processes.
If the command output contains All processes have been stopped
successfully!, it indicates that all service processes are stopped. Otherwise, run the
sau4ebc_kill command to forcibly stop the service processes.

5.3.1.4 sau4ebc_kill
This section describes the command for forcibly stopping all SAU service processes.

Command Syntax
sau4ebc_kill

Issue 04 (2014-09-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright © Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager Tool(OSS-SAU) Appendix A: SAU Command ReferenceAppendix A:
User Guide SAU Command Reference

Function
1. Application scenario
You are advised not to forcibly stop SAU service processes. If a process is suspended or
abnormal, you can perform this operation.
2. Example
Forcibly stop all SAU service processes.

Authorized User
This command is executed by user root.

Prerequisites
You have set environment variables by running the svc_profile.sh script on the Dopra Linux
operating system.

Precautions
 Normally, you can run the sau4ebc_stop command to stop SAU services.
 If you run the sau4ebc_kill command, service data loss or service exceptions may occur.
Therefore, this command is the last resort to forcibly stopping SAU services.

Application Example
# cd /opt/ebcsau

# . ./svc_profile.sh
# sau4ebc_kill

Forcibly stop all SAU service processes.

5.3.1.5 sau4ebc_ps
This section describes the command for viewing SAU service process status on the SAU
board.

Command Syntax
sau4ebc_ps

Function
This command is used to check the operating status of all SAU services on the SAU board.

Authorized User
This command is executed by user root.

Prerequisites
You have set environment variables by running the svc_profile.sh script on the